Home

R&S SMB100A Complete Manual

1. ccsscccssseeeenneeeeneees 4 48 6 36 Sweep LF Start Ireouencky 4 80 6 44 Sweep LF stop freguenck 4 80 6 44 Sweep RF Sween 4 45 6 38 6 70 6 79 Sweep Start Level 4 53 6 70 SWEEP Stop Level adros nnee e E 4 53 6 71 Sweep Trigger 4 47 4 53 4 79 6 102 Sweep spacing Level ween 4 53 6 82 SWEEP spacing RF ween 4 48 6 80 SVN aX Gror 102 rese 9 9 System directo seisis riie aian a aTi hens 3 21 6 14 Systenr E EE 9 9 System Settings Setup ccccccececsececsececsececeeeaneeeenees 4 12 T Terminator recognition cccccccceceneeceeeeeeesseneeeseeseneneees 6 89 Test point voltage depiayv 4 8 6 9 Text DANIO CIS oinin Ee 5 16 This modulation forces other modulations off 140 9 13 FME SSe U Rea SG E eon haters 4 11 6 97 E 2 Index Foo many digits 1 24 sec edasseicotenacdssesieonneviiniencane 9 9 FOO MuCA Cala 223 E 9 10 Reie 1 11 Trigger Mode Pulse Modulaton 4 74 6 75 Trigger Source Level ween 4 51 6 102 Trigger Source LF Sween 4 77 6 99 Trigger Source List Mode 4 55 6 60 Trigger Source RF Zween 4 45 6 100 Triggering Sweep MANUAll cccceeeeeeee eee 4 53 6 79 6 81 U EE 9 3 OHO VING ee E DESEN 1 21 Undefined header 772 9 10 Uninterrupted level settmg 4 34 6 20 lU 3 9 Universal COMMANG EE 8 4 UNIX COMU ONOT EE 1 21 Unknown list type Specified 247 9 13 Unmount USB Setup REENEN 4 15 Upper CASO EE 6 1 Use Level Adjustmen
2. Compliant MMEMory DCATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories of the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The directories are output in a list the list entries are separated by commas The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM DCAT reads out the subdirectories of the current directory Response test wave digital the subdirectories Test wave and digital exist in the current directory RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific MMEMory DCATalog LENGth lt path gt This command reads out the number of subdirectories in the specified directory If no directory is specified the directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out Example MMEM DCAT LENG reads out the number of subdirectories in the current directory Response 3 there are 3 subdirectories in the current directory RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 17 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB MMEMory DELete le name gt This command deletes the specified file The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM DEL var rs_gen TEST1 SAVRCL deletes the file Test1 savrcl inthe USER directory on the internal CompactFlash Card RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant
3. MMEMory MDIRectory lt directory_name gt The command creates a new subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified a subdirectory is created in the default directory This command can also be used to create a directory tree The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MDIR carrier creates the subdirectory carrier in the current directory RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt file_destination gt This command renames an existing file if no path is specified for lt file_destination gt Otherwise the file is moved to the specified path and stored under the original file name or if specified a new file name lt is also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt msus_source gt lt file_destination gt lt msus_destination gt The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM MOVE testl savrcl keepl savrcl renames the file testl savrcls aS keepl savrcl MMEM MOVE testl savrcl smb_one keepl savrcl moves the file test1 savrcl1 to the subdirectory smb_one and stores it there under the name keepl savrcl RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant MMEMory MSIS lt msus gt The command is without effect for the Linux operating system of R amp S SM
4. SOURce JAM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates amplitude modulation Example AM STAT ON activates AM modulation RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 24 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce CORRection Subsystem The output level is corrected in the CORRection subsystem Correction is performed by user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency In the R amp S Signal Generator this subsystem is used to select transfer and activate user correction tables see also Chapter 4 Each list is stored as a file The name of the user correction file can be freely selected The file extension uco is assigned automatically and cannot be changed The files can be stored in a freely selectable directory and opened from there The default directory is set using command MMEMory CDIRectory In the case of files which are stored in the default directory only the file name has to be specified in commands Otherwise the complete absolute path has to be specified with every command The extension can be omitted in any case Note In the following command examples the files are stored in the default directory The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted Command Parameters SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog C ens Query only SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 300 KHz RF imax 300 Lan kHz REmax
5. lf an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The IEC IEEE bus interface commands are emulated see IEC IEEE Bus Messages Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line not being active ASCII character set is used If an Ethernet connection is present signalling via a hardware control line is not required The device messages are equal for the different interfaces IEC IEEE bus and Ethernet A distinction is made according to the direction in which they are sent Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device Program functions and request information Messages The commands are subdivided according to two criteria 1 According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for output on the IEC IEEE bus e g for identification of the device or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header 1407 0806 32 9 9 E 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R amp S SMB 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Common Commands are exactly defined as to their function and notation in standard IEEE 488 2 They refer to functions such as management
6. 359 9 deg The command specifies the phase variation relative to the current phase The variation can be specified in RADians Example PHAS 2DEG changes the phase by 2 degrees relative to the current phase PHAS REF adopts the set phase as the current phase RST value Resolution Options SCPI O 0 deg E 0 1 deg oe Compliant SOURce PHASe REFerence The command adopts the phase set with SOURce PHASe ADJust as the current phase The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example PHAS 0 1RAD changes the phase by 0 1 rad relative to the current phase PHAS REF adopts the set phase as the current phase RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 62 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce PM Subsystem The PM subsystem contains the commands for checking the phase modulation The PhiM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce PM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem e g frequency The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector a IsouRcesPMEXTemaicOUPing a O oo TSS ISOURcePMaNTemalcij DEVaion OHe aowhe Je ooo SOURce PM MODE NORMal HDEViation LNOise SOURce PM SENSitivity 0 Hz 40 MHz Query only SOURce PM SOURce EXT INT INT EXT RE SOURce PM STATe ON OFF
7. GET Group Execute Trigger IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local IBLOC device Transition to the Local state manual control PPC Parallel Poll Configure IBPPC device data Configures instrument for parallel poll Additionally the VISUAL BASIC command executes PPE PPD 1407 0806 32 8 4 E 2 R amp S SMB Hardware Interfaces LAN Connector The unit is equipped with an LAN interface as standard The LAN connector is at the rear of the instrument Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator files can be transmitted via the network and network resources e g a network folders can be used The instrument can also be remote controlled and manually operated in the network It is connected by means of a commercial RJ45 cable The network card functions with 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Connection of the Vector Signal Generator is described in Chapter 1 section Connection to the Network remote control via Ethernet in Chapter 5 section Remote control via Ethernet T
8. Screen saver A screen saver is activated by default in the R amp S SMB The display is shut off when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboard are made for a period of time The screen saver prolongs the life time of the display The screen saver can be switched off and on and the time period can be set in the Environment section of the Setup menu Connecting an External Keyboard and Mouse A commercial external keyboard and mouse with USB interface can be connected to the R amp S SMB A keyboard simplifies entry of list items comments file names etc A mouse simplifies control of the block diagram and of associated menus The keyboard and the mouse are connected to a USB interface type A on rear panel of the instrument The keyboard and mouse are recognized automatically when it is connected The US keyboard assignment is the default setting The keyboard assignment and special settings such as the refresh rate can be changed in the Environment section of the Setup menu 1407 0812 62 1 18 E 2 R amp S SMB Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN The R amp S SMB is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the network administrator the instrument can be remote controlled and remote accessed in the network Remote access means that the user
9. REON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The power on behavior of the R amp S SMB Signal Generator and the level display in the display header are set in the Power On EMF Settings section Power On EMF Settings Power On State Previous Setting e Display Level as Voltage of EMF Power On State RF Selects the state which the RF output is to assume after the SEEEDR instrument is switched on RF Off The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on Remote control command OUTP PON OFF Previous When the instrument is switched on the output Setting assumes the same state as it had when the instrument was switched off Remote control command OUTP PON ON Display Level as Voltage of Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF no load EMF RF Level voltage If this setting is deactivated the level is displayed as a voltage with 50 Ohm presetting Remote control command n a 1407 0806 32 4 36 E 2 R amp S SMB Automatic Level Control ALC Automatic Level Control ALC Automatic level control Automatic Level Control can be used with almost all applications except for pulse modulation The level control status is permanently displayed as a status message in the info line ALC Auto Info The standard operating status is level control On This provides the highest level accuracy T
10. Remote control command SOUR FM EXT COUP AC DC The modulation signal is dc coupled Remote control command SOUR FM EXT COUP DC Ee Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 met onape EN Source Internal LFGen2 only Selects the shape of the second LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO SHAP SQU Phase Modulation PhiM An internal and or external source can be selected for phase modulation A LF modulation generator is available as internal sources The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Selection between three modulation modes is possible Normal mode with full setting range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation Low Phase noise mode with better signal noise ratio but reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth and deviation see data sheet High Deviation mode with full setting range for PhiM deviation and a reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth Phase noise is reduced in the lower modulation frequency range compared to Normal mode Note It is not possible to use phase modulation simultaneously with frequency modulation 1407 0806 32 4 68 E 2 R amp S SMB Phase Modulation PhiM Phase Modulation Menu The Phase Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the key under
11. The help system is embedded in the instrument offering quick context sensitive reference to the information needed for operation and programming The help contains the complete user documen tation for the Signal Generator including the contents of the pre sent quick start guide The help files chm are also available on the CD ROM and can be used as a standalone help 1407 0812 62 0 1 E 2 User Documentation Documentation CD ROM Optional Documentation 1407 0812 62 R amp S SMB The CD ROM provides the complete user documentation for the Signal Generator The online help system chm The complete operating manual and service manual in printable form pdf The data sheet brochure and specifications in printable form Links to different useful sites in the R amp S internet Note Please use the ADOBE Acrobat Reader for PDF files and the browser Internet Explorer gt 4 0 for the HTML help The printed version of the operating and service manual provides the contents of the quick start manual plus the complete reference and the service information for the Signal Generator This manual can be ordered as an option stock no 1407 0806 32 English A4 format or 1407 0806 39 English letter format see ordering information in the data sheet Note The CD ROM contains the pdf version of the manuals Manual Control The operating manual contains comprehensive information about the
12. type B device for remote control of USB Connection signal generator USB and USB IN 4 USB connectors type A USB USB universal serial bus interfaces See chapter 1 section of type A host Connecting an Connection of peripherals such External Keyboard and as mouse and keyboard Mouse and chapter 8 Connection of memory stick for section USB firmware update Connection USB and USB IN 5 LAN interface LAN Ethernet interface See data sheet and Remote control of signal chapter 1 section generator Connecting the Remote access to graphical user R amp S SMB to a Network interface of signal generator LAN chapter 8 section LAN Connector and chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface 6 IEC IEEE bus connector IEEE 488 IEC 625 IEEE 488 See data sheet and IEC bus IEEE 488 interface for chapter 8 section remote control of the R amp S SMB IEC IEEE Bus Interface 7 Inputs for analog modulation signals option R amp S SMB B5 STEREO STEREO R L ie L Inputs for analog stereo modulation signals External modulation sources or the internal LF generator can be used stereo modulation is available with option R amp S SMB B5 8 Input for digital stereo signals option R amp S SMB B5 SIP DIF S P DIF Input for digital stereo signals stereo modulation is available with option R amp S SMB B5 1407 0812 62 1 10 E 2 R amp S SMB 9 SIGNAL VALID SIGNAL VALID ef SIGNA
13. 4 42 6 31 Mode IP Address Zeiup 4 12 6 92 Modulation AM 4 62 6 23 Modulation EM 4 65 6 33 Modulation DM 4 68 6 63 Modulation Pulse modulation uu cccccecec cece eeeee es 4 72 6 72 Modulation depth AM 4 63 6 23 6 24 Modulation deviation EM 4 67 6 33 6 34 Modulation deviation PhiM cccccccccccseceeaee 4 70 6 63 6 64 Mount USB S6tup NEE 4 15 EIERE 1 18 Multi transmitter measurements cc ccc cece cece cce sees eee ee eens 4 37 N Network card ee Ee 1 19 Netvork SOTINGS ees eege eisen 4 11 NO CUITERETIST 241 e e 9 13 NO GNOr UO ee ee 9 7 No load voltage EMP 1cccccsseecsssseecsneeseeseesaeeseaaes 4 36 N mber ele eier 4 7 Numeric data not allowedt728p1 9 7 O Offset Frequency ccccccseeccceeseecneneesenssessesessanss 4 27 6 39 Offset Leve EE 4 34 6 68 OP GTAUON POUS aa cales etn Get ee ERE 4 5 6 9 1407 0806 32 10 4 R amp S SMB Option ek elen LE 4 7 ISING SE 4 6 6 4 QUE OF INEMOLY EE 9 7 OUTDO UE LE sis eee n a eta hee aed eat ae 4 76 6 42 Output REP OUT EE 1 11 6 77 QUM HARE E 1 8 OV CIIC OIG EE 9 3 Overlapping execution ssn nsisi sa 5 19 OVERLOAD EE 4 35 Overvoltage GDrofechon 4 35 6 21 P Faalen POU EE 5 26 Parameter commande 5 15 Parameter not allowed 708 9 7 eege 4 5 EE 4 23 EE eebe 4 5 Peer to peer connechon 1 20 Phase RF output sonal 4 29 6 62 PRIM DO VIAatiON ccccecceeeccseeceseeeeeeseeeesees 4 70 6 63 6 64 PhiM Extern
14. CALibration Subsystem The CALibration system contains the commands for adjustment Adjustment is triggered by the query commands The response 0 indicates error free adjustment and the response 1 means that an error occurred during adjustment C REERE CALibration ALL MEASure PL Query only CALibration FMOFfset MEASure PL Query only CALibration FREQuency MEASure fr if Query only CALibration LEVel STATe ON OFF ae CALibration _LEVel MEASure PT Query only CALibration ALL MEASure The command starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL ALL starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument Response 0 adjustment has been performed successfully RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant CALibration FMOFfset MEASure The command starts all adjustment for the FM PhiM modulator The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL FMOF starts the adjustments for the FM PhiM modulator Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific CALibration FREQuency MEASure The command starts all adjustments which affect the frequency The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL FREQ starts the adjustments for maximum frequ
15. Display The display is divided into two sections Frequency and level display with info line Block diagram 1407 0812 62 1 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Legend for Front Panel View 2 Display Display In addition the Winbar can be called with the key The Winbar indicates open menus by a labelled button When a button is clicked using the rotary knob the associated menu is displayed either in the foreground or minimized in the Winbar The block diagram shows the current configuration and the signal flow in the generator with the aid of function blocks containing an on off switch Clicking the function block opens a list of associated setting menus Active menus and info windows are displayed on top of the block diagram The block diagram can be displayed in the foreground anytime with the key 3 Keys for setting frequency and level emm FREQ Activates frequency entry See chapter 3 section FREQ Setting Parameters LEVEL Activates level entry and chapter 4 section RF Signal and Modulations LEVEL 4 Keypad for data entry i i GA Keypad for data entry See chapter 3 section 8 9 fam Oi Setting Parameters e Entry of numeric values HN e eg Entry of decimal point a bc Entry of letters Entry of a space ZS Entry of special characters Aea Switchover between uppercase and lowercase letters 1407 0812 62 1 3 E 2 Legend for Front Panel View 4 Keypad for data entry 1407 0812 62 E
16. Info Key R amp S SMB Messages Info Key The key opens a window containing a detailed description of every message displayed in the info bar see chapter 3 section nfo and Status Bar and chapter 9 section Error Messages Help System Help Key The key opens a browser window containing a context sensitive description of the highlighted parameter Contents Index Back Previous Next Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup All Parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings Remote contral command RST Be The context sensitive page which is opened with the key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system The following navigation aids are available Contents link The Contents link calls up the contents list The contents list is used to open the individual help pages It has a hierarchical structure The highlighted line indicates where the currently displayed page is within the contents list Index link The Index link calls up the index The index contains an alphabetical list of all terms which refer to functions of the instrument For example it contains all parameter names and all IEC IEEE bus commands The associated help page can
17. List Mode data 4 60 Select ASCII Destination User Correction data 4 42 Select ASCII Source List Mode data 4 60 Select ASCII Source User Correction data 4 42 Select LIST EEN 4 58 6 59 Select Operation File menu 4 19 Select Test POINT errioa eaae OR 4 8 6 98 SEIECHON NEII DEE 3 9 Self te Staa EE 6 5 6 98 Self test failed 320 9 8 Semicolon eeparator nenene 5 17 SNA 61 eee ee Re eee a R otra 4 5 Serial number 4 5 6 3 e Ee 5 26 Service request SO 6 5 Service Request GSbRO 5 26 seling PALAINOlOLS EE 3 10 SENGS CONCE scx 22 1 E DEE 9 9 SOLU EE 4 3 SADE EE 4 64 Eechelen eebe 4 68 Shape LF generatof ccccccccccccsesecssescecenssssseseesensesses 4 82 Shape LF generator 2 6 44 BOY 12 6 2 EF EE 4 71 SNO E 3 25 Ee 5 15 Slope Instrument trigger pute 4 54 4 81 6 41 Slope pulse trigger mput 4 75 6 74 DOMWAlC OPOS srode ee Aao ER 4 6 6 4 Source EE 4 63 6 24 SOUC FM EEN 4 66 6 35 Source Level Sweep Tnoger 4 51 6 102 1407 0806 32 10 5 Index Source LF Sweep Tgger 4 77 6 99 Source List Mode Tgoger 4 55 6 60 SOUC 5 PUM EE 4 69 Source Pulse Modulatton 4 73 6 74 Source Reference Oscillator cccccccccccceecneeees 4 30 6 77 Source RF Sweep Tgger 4 45 6 100 Source Import Export List Mode data 4 60 6 55 Source Import Export User Correction data 4 43 6 31 Spacing Level ween 4 53 6 82 Spacing LF ween 4 80 6 47 Spacin
18. SOUR LFO tPREO MODE SWE External trigger 1407 0806 32 4 8 E 2 R amp S SMB LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block Extern Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is Start Stop started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SOUR EAUT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Reset Sweep LF Sweep Resets the sweep The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there Remote control command SWE RES ALL Execute Single Sweep LF Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Sweep Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR SING SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ EXEC 1407 0806 32 4 79 E 2 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMB The sweep range swee
19. The File Manager can also be called up in the Save Recall Setup Settings menu In the upper area File Type the File Manager allows the type file selection to be displayed This can be used to process either all files all files selection or a specific selection of files e g user correction ucor selection The table at the end of this section contains a list of the file types The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed above the windows If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed Unlike the File Select window the File Manager displays the full file names including extensions The buttons trigger the associated actions such as copying shifting or deleting the marked files Plus a new directory can be created in the level below the marked directory Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters page 3 12 By using the rotary knob or cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by clicking the rotary knob or using the Enter key The rotary knob and up down cursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys it is possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory wil
20. oroblems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be made in the sum bit RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus QUEue NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see Chapter 9 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to sYSTem ERRor Example STAT QUE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 87 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SYSTem Subsystem The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do not directly affect signal generation ian oa ONTOFF S STem GOMMUnicateNETWorkCOMMonSET SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS ALTernate 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS MODE STATic AUTO No query No query SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS SET No query SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS PREFerred 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STATic P2P AUTO SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SET Le No query SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff SYSTem COMMunicate
21. 50 kHz 0 1 Hz Compliant SOURce LFOutput2 SHAPe SINE SQUare The command selects the shape of the LF generator Example LFO SHAP SQU selects a rectangular shape for the signal of the LF generator RST value Resolution Options SCPI SINE Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 44 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LFOutput STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates the LF output Example LFO ON activates the LF output The settings under LFO FREQ and LFO SWE become effective RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELI 2 ms 10s The command sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with Short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF Example LFO SWE DWEL 20 ms sets a dwell time of 20 ms RST value Resolution Options SCPI 10ms oim o Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute The command immediately starts an LF sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE SING1le The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example LFO SWE MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the LF sweep LFO SWE EXEC starts one cycle of the LF sweep
22. 9 15 E 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R amp S SMB Text Strings Block data 1407 0806 32 Text parameters observe the syntax rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command SOURce SWEep POWer MODE MANual Query SOURCe SWEep POWer MODE Answer MAN Strings must always be entered within quotation marks or Example CORR CSET UCOR1 or CORR CSET UCORI1 Block data are a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Example MMEMory DATA test_file wv 45168xxxxxxxx Test_file wv denotes the name of the file to which the data are written The comma is followed by the binary data block The hash symbol introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted The format of the binary files within the block depends on the IEC IEEE bus command SsOURce LIST FREQuency POWer SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQ
23. DEXC PAPI IMSEL vans rs gen 11st modes import sl st esv selects ASCII file list csv as destination for the list mode list data LIST DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator LIST DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot LIST DEXCSSEL var rsgen l1stmode import li stim selects that the list mode list list_imp is imported into ASCII file list csv 1407 0806 32 6 53 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal DOT COMMa The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Example LIST DEXC MODE EXP selects that the list mode list is exported into an ASCII file TST SDEXC TAP TE SEL yar ts gen 11 Sstmode import 1 st esy selects ASCII file list csv as destination for the list mode list data LIST DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator LIST DEXC APIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot LIST DEXC SEL var rs_gen listmode import list_imp selects that the list mode list list_imp is imported into ASCII file list csv SOURce LIST DEXChange EXECute The command starts the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as list mode list When export is selected the list mode list is exported in
24. Example SYST COMM GPIB LTER EOI only a character which is sent simultaneously with the line message EOI is accepted as the terminator RST value Resolution Options SCPI STANdad i Compliant SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess 1 30 The command sets the IEC IEEE bus address Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 14 sets IEC IEEE bus address 14 RST value Resolution Options SCPI 28 Fb Compliant SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon HOSTname string The command enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMB The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW COMM SET Note The hostname can only be changed after deactivating protection level 1 command SYSTem PROTect lt n gt STATe OFF password Example SYST COMM NETW HOST SMB enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMB SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates the change of the hostname RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 89 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork COMMon SET The command activates the hostname setting Command SYST COMM NETW COMM HOST The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW COMM SET activates a change of the hostname RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS ALTernate 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff
25. FM MODE HDEV Sets the modulation depth in Hz The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message Is displayed The deviation of the internal source must not exceed the deviation of the external source in case of modulation source Int Ext Remote control command SOUR EM DEM 1kHz SOUR FM EXT DEV 10kHz Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in Hz V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under FM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Note The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 V otherwise modulation distortions might occur Remote control command SOUR FM SENS Response 1E3 Starts the adjustment for the FM PhiM modulator The option is adjusted with respect to DC offset Remote control command CAL FMOF 4 67 E 2 Phase Modulation PhiM R amp S SMB FM Ext Coupling Source External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source AC The d c voltage content is separated from the modulation signal
26. G Gate Input Polarity Pulse Modulation 4 75 6 75 Gated Signal Pulse Modulation 1 c10ccc0eee 4 74 6 75 Gateway Setup ccccccccceeseccesecenseecneesseaseesnes 4 13 6 92 GET Group Execute Trigger c cccsssescsssseecnseeseaneees 5 19 Get System Settings Sein 4 12 Getting Stan DEE 2 1 H Hardware CONG EE 4 5 6 8 Hardware error 24201 9 5 Hardware MISSING 247 9 6 Hardware ODUONS EE 4 6 6 4 Hardware revision out Of date CO 9 13 PAC AO ON EE 5 11 Header suffix out of range 774 9 6 FIOSINAIMG SOUP EE 4 12 IEC IEEE bus command description 6 1 EE EE 1 10 IECAEEE bDUS address 4 16 6 89 Illegal parameter value 2242 9 6 Impedance External Jnputs neces seen eees 6 74 Impedance PULSE EST 4 73 6 41 Impedance RF outputs n00naaananeannnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnn 6 21 Impedance Trigger Gate Signal Pulse Modulation 4 75 Import Export List Mode data 4 59 4 60 6 54 Import Export User Correction data 4 41 4 43 6 30 INFOK CV ebe EE 3 6 LADUE TING E 1 11 Input PULSE EX EE 4 72 6 72 MPIC REF TN EE 1 11 MPU tr 5 18 1407 0806 32 10 3 Index Install SW ODUON EE 4 7 Instrument Contg cccccccsceccseeeeccsesccsnseecsenecsnssesseas 4 5 6 8 Instrument settings recall 4 21 6 4 Instrument settings gave 4 20 6 5 6 19 Instrument settings reese 1 17 Instrument trigger input slope 4 54 4 81 6 41 Interface IECAIEEE bus 1 10 I
27. LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMB the value entered with command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR LFO FREQ MAN has no effect the command only sets the next sweep step In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible Extern Single Sets asingle sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single sweep always starts at the start frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR EXT SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Extern Step Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Step sweep always starts at the LF start frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE STEP SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR LFOSSWE FREQ STRE LION LES TRIGO SWE SOUR EXE
28. Optional key words Some command systems permit certain key words to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These key words are marked by square brackets in this manual The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by omitting optional key words 1407 0806 32 5 11 E 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R amp S SMB Long and short form Parameters Numeric suffix 1407 0806 32 Example SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 1 This command immediately sets the offset of the signal to 1 dB The following command has the same effect POWer OFFSet 1 The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle 1 STAT QUES ENAB 1 Note Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case letters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma A few queries permit the parameters MINimum MAXimum and DEFault to be entered For a description of the types of parameter refer to Section Parameters Example SOURce POWer ATTenuation MAXimum Answer 60 his query requests the ma
29. Pulse Generator An internal or external source can be selected for pulse modulation In case of external source the external signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector at the rear of the instrument In case of internal source this connector can be used as external trigger or gate signal input for internal pulse modulation The polarity and input impedance of the connector can be selected The pulse signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument NOTE The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMB is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hold In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after each frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Pulse Modulation Menu The Pulse Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the key under Mod Modulation Amplitude Mod Frequency Mod Phase Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu Source External Polarity Normal Exte
30. R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST DELete lt list file name gt The command deletes the specified list The files are stored with the fixed file extensions Isw in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR To access the files in this directory only the file name has to be given without the path and the file extension A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST CAT in which case the file in the specified directory is deleted RST does not affect data lists Example MMEM CDIR var lists listmode selects the directory for the list mode files DIST spat LISTI deletes the list list1 le Co SOURce LIST DELete ALL The command deletes all lists in the set directory The List mode must be deactivated beforehand to ensure that no lists are selected when this command is called SOUR FREQ MODE CW or SWE The files are stored with the fixed file extensions Isw in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST CAT in which case all list mode files in the specified directory are deleted RST does not affect data lists Example MMEM CDIR var lists listmode selects the directory for the list mode files FREQ MODE SWE deactivates the List mode for and activates the Sweep mode LA STIDELe
31. Recall and then storing it under a new name Settings can be transferred easily between instruments with different equipment options and or firmware versions because only the settings which differ from the preset values are affected When settings are loaded only those which are possible on the instrument are implemented Error messages indicate the settings which cannot be implemented The stored file is transferred from one instrument to another using the memory stick General file management functions such as copying and moving data are available in the File Manager submenu File Menu The settings available in the File menu depend on the operation selected under Select Operation Select Operation Save Select Operation Selects the file function Save Calls the menu for storing the current instrument setting Recall Calls the menu for calling up a stored instrument setting 1407 0806 32 4 19 E 2 Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key R amp S SMB Storing Instrument Settings File If Save is selected under Select Operation the File menu provides options for storing the current instrument setting in a file Select Operation recent data sets File Name modam SE Save Save File Imm 1 imm 2 Manager Recent data sets File Directory File File List File File Name File Save File 1407 0806 32 Displays the files last used The entire path is shown in plain text Remote
32. Recall instrument seifumgs 4 21 4 22 6 4 Recall Intermediate EE 4 22 6 4 Recent Aala SClS EE 4 21 at Ee 1 11 Eeer 1 11 EE 4 30 Reference frequency exfemal 4 31 6 76 E 2 R amp S SMB Reference frequency adjustment mode 4 31 6 76 Reference OSGINQION Ee Ee let 4 30 6 76 REN BS EE 9 2 REMOTE EEN 9 2 Remote control Eibermeti AN 5 4 Remote Control GI 5 3 Remote control manual 1 21 Remote CONTIOL eege ed 5 1 Remote control switchouver 5 2 Remote to local swiichover 5 3 EE ee 4 24 6 18 Reset Instrument settings ENNEN 1 17 Reset Delta Phase Display cccccccccseeeeeeeeeee 4 29 6 62 Reset instrument seitgs 100n00a00a00a00aaanne 4 2 6 4 6 96 Reset Status reporting Svstenm 5 28 Restoring the previous value 3 16 REVISIONS TE 4 5 EE Ee ee 2 3 RF 1POQUENGCY EE 4 27 6 36 6 37 EE 9 1 RF ET 4 25 6 22 RF output Power on State cccccccccneeenenneens 4 36 6 22 RF output OVE cs oscsci vi ccotasevhaiscinincemieustohesesesed ness 4 33 6 67 RF output signal Phase adiusiment 4 29 6 62 FR SOCHON EE 2 1 PRES WEG EE 9 2 RIAS e 1 19 EECHER tans O R wees 1 6 S Sample and Hold mode 4 37 6 66 sSsaveimmediale s ees el este EE N Ste 4 21 6 5 Save instrument seitnge 4 20 4 21 6 5 6 19 SCPI conformity Information 6 1 SCPI error messages 9 4 SCPL VCS ON D 5 1 Screen Saver Setup 4 15 6 10 Search Once ALC wcities 4 38 6 67 Select ASCII Destination
33. SOUR POW STAR 100 Sets the stop level Remote control command SOUR POW STOP 10 Displays the current level If Step is set the level for the next level step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR POW MAN 30 Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes With the level sweep the logarithmic step width is a constant fraction of the current level This fraction is added to the current level The logarithmic step width is entered in dB Remote control command SOUR SWE POW STEP 3 Enters the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command SOUR SWE POW DWEL 10ms 4 53 E 2 List Mode R amp S SMB Ext Trigger Input Slope Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger This setting affects the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG List Mode Similar to a Sweep a series of previously defined frequency and level points is processed in LIST mode In contrast to a sweep however a list with freely selec
34. entries can be made Most of the settings can be easily made with the rotary knob Operation is possible via front panel keys an external keyboard and the mouse Most of the settings can be made with the rotary knob e Turning the rotary knob shifts the entry focus to the desired element 1407 0812 62 3 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Operating Concept e Clicking the rotary knob activates the selected entry field Depending on the parameter the submenu is now called the numeric value varied the list entry selected or the check box activated or deactivated e fa value is entered the entry is stored by another click on the rotary knob and the editing mode is exited Clear settings with the aid of independent submenus A separate menu is opened for each menu and submenu The menus can be operated independently of each other i e none of the menus requires that settings in other menus be completed before it can be closed This ensures flexible operation at all times The Winbar gives an overview of menus and simplifies their access The menus are displayed on top of the block diagram but they can be hidden using the key They can be displayed again in full size key This makes room on the screen for other displays that may be required but the setting menus can thus be accessed any time The keys are assigned simple functions Most keys on the front panel of the R amp S SMB directly perform a simple function Since a great number of
35. key Select the desired item using Select the desired item using the rotary knob or the arrow the arrow keys and activate keys up down and activate by with Enter clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key Select an index term Select Index in the help Select Index in the help Click Indext window using the arrow keys window using the arrow keys The help page of the term is and activate by clicking the left right and activate with the Glick item displayed rotary knob or the ENTER Enter key key Select the desired item using Select the desired item using the rotary knob or the arrow the arrow keys and activate keys up down and activate by with Enter clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key File Management The R amp S SMB uses files to save all instrument data Le system and user data The user data includes saved instrument settings and lists for the user correction The files are stored in the internal memory of the instrument or on a USB memeory stick The var directory can be used to save user defined data any subdirectory structure can be created on var Some default subdirectories are predefined but can be changed at any time The opt directory is a protected and therefore unaccessable system directory The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss To prev
36. state pret BCE MODOFF_ Level a 1 000 000 000 0 erz 30 00 m Set a defined instrument state by pressing the PRESET key Modulation config IT On 1407 0812 62 2 4 E 2 R amp S SMB Example of Setup Step 2 Select and activate AM modulation A 2 Modulation config IT On Select the Mod block by turning the rotary knob Frequency Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the modulation can be selected different modulation modes are available depending on the options installed The Amplitude Mod menu is the first menu and is highlighted per default AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 0000 kHz Press the rotary knob to open the Amplitude LFGen Shape Sine Modulation menu O AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 000 0 kHz LFGen Shape Sine sl J dbp o fe N c lt Select the AM Depth parameter by turning the rotary knob and then enter the desired AM depth with the aid of the numeric keypad and the unit keys 1407 0812 62 2 9 E 2 Example of Setup R amp S SMB AM Source INTernal Finally switch on AM modulation by selecting LFGen Freq 1 000 0 kHz State On and subsequently pressing the rotary knab LFGen Shape Sine To indicate the active state the Mod block is displayed in blue The RF Mod is not yet active which means that no RF signal is output
37. the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE The IST flag Individual STatus and the parallel poll enable register PPE allocated to it are also part of the status reporting system The IST flag like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE fulfills an analog function for the IST flag as the SRE for the service request The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB Overview of the Status Register The following figure shows the status registers used in the Signal Generator Power on User Request Command Error Execution Error Device Dependent Error Query Error Request Control Operation Complete SRQ Pe SEER EO O NW BOD N ESE ESR SRE Error Queue Output Buffer KZ z8 BZ Ria amp logical AND PPE a of all bits ISiflag response to parallel poll Overview of status registers 1407 0806 32 9 23 E 2 Status Reporting System R amp S SMB Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STATUS BYTE is read out using the command STB or a
38. when the list is used for the first time learning is automatically activated Remote control command SOUR LIST LEAR 4 57 E 2 List Mode List Mode Data List Mode Edit List Mode Data List Mode 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Calls the File Select menu for selecting and creating a list or the File Manager Remote control command SOUR LIST CAT Response MYLIST LIST1 LIST2 SOUR LIST SEL LIST2 SOUR LIST DEL LIST1 SOUR LIST DEL ALL Calls the editor for editing the selected list A list consists of any number of frequency level value pairs The currently selected list is displayed s Frequency Hz Doww dm 1 9 000 00 40 00 3 bo oga 000 00 10 00 DIT LIST MODE DATA HIGH LEVEL Goto InsertFill Rawls Save D Frequency Hz Enter the frequency of the frequency power value pair Remote control command SOURtDIST FPREO 1 4 6Hz 1 36H7 16HZ Pow dBm Enter the level of the frequency power value pair Remote control command SOUR LIST POW OdBm 2dBm 2dBm 3dBm Goto Selects row for editing If Goto row is selected a window opens for entering the requested row OE Cancel Remote control command n a it is not possible to change individual positions of the list Insert Fill Insert a new row before the marked row Row s Remote control command n a 4 58 E 2 R amp S SMB List Range In List Mode Import Export List Mode Mode Lis
39. 000 000 00 GHz The entry is activated by pressing the key Changes to the frequency have an immediate effect without confirmation with the Enter key on the output signal Remote control command SOUR FREQ 100 MHz Note The IEC IEEE bus command sets the level of the Freq display i e an entered frequency offset is taken into consideration in the frequency value see below The frequency entered and displayed in the frequency entry field takes any set frequency offset into consideration e g an offset set for a downstream instrument This means that with a frequency offset the frequency displayed in the header does not correspond to the frequency at the RF output but rather to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument A set frequency offset is indicated by the FREQ OFFSET status message This allows the desired frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered in the frequency field The R amp S SMB Signal Generator changes the RF output frequency according to the entered offset However the frequency entered and displayed in the Frequency menu of the RF function block always corresponds to the RF output frequency Any frequency offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Freq in header RF output frequency Freq in menu Freq offset Offset in menu Frequency offset by the instrument Offset in the Frequency menu s ER Ose Frequency at
40. 4 section If a frequency offset is entered the frequency entered with SOURce FREQuency no longer corresponds to the RF output frequency The following correlation applies SOURce FREQuency RF output frequency SOURce FREQuency OFFSet Entering an offset does not change the RF output frequency but rather the query value of Example SOUR FREQ OFFS 500kHz sets the frequency offset to 500 kHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI 0 Hz ons Compliant SOURce FREQuency SPAN 0 RFmax RFmax depending on model This command specifies the span for the sweep This setting in combination with the center frequency setting SOUR FREQ CENT defines the sweep range This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ STAR and SOUR FREQ STOP L changing these values causes the SPAN value to change and vice versa SPAN STOP START Negative values for SPAN are permitted STARt gt STOP then applies Example FREQ CENT 400 MHz sets the center frequency of the frequency sweep to 400 MHz FREQ SPAN 200 MHz sets a span of 200 MHz This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz to 500 MHz RST value Resolution Options Correlation SCPI 400 MHz 0 01 Hz SPAN STOP START Compliant SOURce FREQuency STARt 300 kHz RF max RFmax depending on model This command sets the start frequency for the sweep mode STARt can be greater than STOP This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ CENT and SOUR FR
41. 69 E 2 Phase Modulation PhiM R amp S SMB PhiM Mode PhiM Deviation 1407 0806 32 Ext Selects the external source for analog phase modulation The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PM SOUR EXT Int Ext Selects the internal and external source at the same time The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PM SOUR NIT EST Selects the mode for the phase modulation Normal The full range for modulation bandwidth and PM deviation is available Remote control command SOUR PM MODE NORM High Deviation The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available Phase noise is improved for low frequencies compared to Normal mode The range for modulation frequency is limited see data sheet This mode is recommended for low modulation frequencies and high PhiM deviation Remote control command SOUR PM MODE HDEV Low Noise Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode The range for modulation bandwidth and PM deviation is reduced see data sheet Remote control command SOUR PM MODE LNO Sets the modulation deviation in RAD The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be set In this
42. ALL deletes all list mode files available in the set directory RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 51 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LIST DEXChange AFILe CATalog The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export import of list mode data The individual files are separated by commas The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST DEXC AFIL CAT in which case the files in the specified directory are read The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists listmode import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs LIST DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed Lisl DExXC AFISCAT queries the available files with extension txt Response listi list2 the ASCII files List1 txt and 1ist2 txt are available Ooo J SOURce LIST DEXChange AFILe EXTension TXT CSV The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Example MMEM CDIR var lists listmode import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value
43. Command Description SOURce SWEep POWer STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 165 dB The command sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next level value of a sweep is calculated for STARt lt STOP using the following formula New level Old level STEP LOG x Old level STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old level The level is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG Is given in decibels whereby the suffix dB must always be used The command is linked to the command SWEep POWer POINts for STARt lt STOP as follows POINts STOP STARt STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained Example SWE POW STEP 10dB sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 dB of the previous level in each instance for a level sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI ER 0 01 op Device specific SOURce SWEep RESet ALL The command resets all active sweeps to the starting point The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example SWE RES resets all active sweeps to the starting point Device specific RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 83 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB STATus Subsystem This system contains the commands for the status reporting system RST has no effect on the status registers Queries return the current value of the respective reg
44. Dytes In ehis directory irese bytes on This dLSk gt y lt file_name gt lt file_type gt lt filesize_in_bytes gt lt file_name gt lt file_type gt lt filesize_in_bytes gt The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Parameters lt file_name gt File or directory name lt file_type gt File type There are the following file types DIR directory ASCii ASCII file BlNary Binary file and STATe file with instrument settings lt filesize_in_bytes gt File size The size 0 is returned for a directory Example MMEM CAT var reads out all files at the highest directory level of the CompactFlash Card Response 127145265 175325184 test DIR O temp DIR 0 readme txt ASC 1324 state savracl STAT 5327 waveform wv BIN 2342 the directory var contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the files readme txt state savrcl and waveform wv which have different file types 1407 0806 32 6 15 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt path gt This command reads out the number of files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CAT LENG var reads out the number of files at the highest directory level of the CompactFlash Card Response 1 there is 1 file at th
45. IPAD SET Example SYST COMM NETW SUBN MASK 255 255 2550 enters the Subnet mask SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate MACaddress The command queries the MAC address of the network adapter The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM NETW MAC queries the MAC address RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource The command queries the visa resource string This string is used for remote control of the instrument The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMM NETW2RES queries the VISA resource string Response TOP TP eS 92 43 hg ee ENOR RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST COMMSUSBERES queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB interface Response USB 2 222 0000002 S1INSER RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 93 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt The command sets the date for the instrument internal calendar Example S
46. In case of modulation source pulse generator the settings for the pulse characteristics and the trigger are offered in the Pulse Generator section of the Pulse Modulation menu Option R amp S SMU K23 offers a variety of features e g generation of double pulse or selection of trigger mode The output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO output is automatically switched on when activating pulse modulation It can be switched off in the Pulse Generator menu of the Mod Gen block Pulse Generator e Pulse Period Pulse Width Pulse Delay Trigger Mode Auto 1407 0806 32 4 73 E 2 Pulse Modulation Pulse Period Pulse Generator Pulse Width Pulse Generator Pulse Delay Pulse Generator Double Pulse State Pulse Generator Double Pulse Width Pulse Generator Double Pulse Delay Pulse Generator Trigger Mode Pulse Generator 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Remote control command SOUR PULM PER 0 05ms Sets the width of the generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period Remote control command SOUR PULM WIDT 22ms Sets the pulse delay The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Remote cont
47. NE TWork MACaddress Query only Query only SYSTem COMMunicate USB RESource SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON OFF Query only SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork RESource LU EECHER C SYSTem PROTeastsTA L uzer see SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt secon d gt SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork GET fo SYSTem VERSion Query only SYSTem BEEPer STATe ON OFF The command switches the key beep on or off Example SYST BEEP STAT OFF no acoustic signal is output when a key on the front panel is pressed RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 88 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB LTERminator EOI STANdard The command sets the terminator recognition for remote control via the IEC IEEE bus Parameters EOI The terminator must be sent together with the line message EOI End of Line This setting is recommended for binary block transmissions where a character could coincidentally have the value LF Line Feed but is not intended as the terminator This setting must be selected for block data with undefined length STANdard An LF Line Feed is recognized as the terminator regardless of whether it is sent with or without EOI
48. Query only Query only Query only SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINs s s isY SOURce CORRection CSET DELete SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 40 dB 6dB 40 dB 6 dB SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect lt ASCIl file name gt SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COL TABulator SEMicolon umn COMMa SPACe SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DEC DOT COMMa Go imal isOURGe GORRecion DEXGhangeEXEGue isouRGeGORRecionwvaLue SCS SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension TXT CSV Query only 1407 0806 32 6 25 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce CORRection CSET CATalog The command requests a list of user correction tables The individual lists are separated by commas The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR CSET CAT in which case the files in the specified directory are read This command is a query command and has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists 7ucor selects the directory for the user correction files CORR SCOR YCAT queries which correction tables are available Response UCOR1 UCOR2 UCOR3 the correction tables UCOR1 UCOR2 and
49. Query only DIAGnostic lt 1 2 gt MEASure POINt lt pointname gt Query only DIAGnostic BGINfo lt module name gt The command checks the modules available in the instrument using the variant and revision state If the command is sent without parameters being specified a complete list of all modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration If the command is sent with parameters a list of the specified modules is returned the various entries are separated by commas A list of modules names can be called up using the DIAG BGIN CATalog command Each entry for one module consists of four parts which are separated by space characters Module name Module stock number incl variant Module revision Module serial number Example DIAG BGIN CAT queries the instrument configuration Response MBRD returns the data of all available modules DIAG BGIN MBRD queries the configuration of the motherboard Response MBRD 1234 5678 02 1 5 3 100023 module motherboard with stock number 1234 5678 02 has revision 1 5 3 and serial number 100023 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific DIAGnostic BGINfo CATalog The command queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument A complete list of all assemblies is returned the various entries are separated by commas The leng
50. R amp S SMB Editors The R amp S SMB provides user friendly editors for defining lists Lists containing frequency and level value pairs are used for the user defined level correction The lists are saved to files and may thus have any length The file name of the lists and the directory to which the files are saved are user selectable The file prefix is different for each list type and is permanenily assigned by the system see section File Management page 3 21 List Editor The User Correction menu provides the list editor for defining the frequency level value pairs The associated buttons call up the list editor Edit User Cor Data e The selected list is displayed If no list has been selected a blank list of only one row is displayed e The value pairs are entered in the Frequency Hz and Power dBm table columns A blank row is inserted at the end of the list e New rows can be inserted anywhere in the table by means of the Insert Row s button e After the list has been edited i e changed it can be saved under its current name by means of the Save button or under a new name by means of the Save as button Only complete value pairs are taken into consideration rows containing an entry in only one column are ignored e An existing list can be edited in the insert or overwrite mode e A new list can be created under a new name either by generating a blank file in the File Select menu see section File Man
51. R amp S SMB stores the current setting before it shuts down the Linux 1 operating system Then the AC supply is switched to the STANDBY mode gt Only the AC supply is powered gt The yellow LED must be on DANGER Danger of shock hazard i The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode gt Press the main power switch at the rear of the instrument to position 0 None of the front panel LEDs should be on Note i It is recommended to switch the instrument to STANDBY mode before Power Power completely disconnecting it from the AC supply If the power switch is switch connector set to 0 before the instrument is switched to the standby mode all current settings are lost Power Fuses The R amp S SMB is fully fused by two fuses IEC127 T3 15H 250 V The A fuses are accommodated in the fuse holders next to the power connector FUSEJ Use only fuses of the mentioned type Ki Ki DANGER Danger of shock hazard i Before replacing the fuses disconnect the power cord from the R amp S SMB 1407 0812 62 1 16 E 2 R amp S SMB Function Check Function Check The signal generator automatically monitors the main functions when the instrument is switched on and continuously during operation If a fault is detected ERROR is displayed in the info line together with a brief error description For in depth identification of the error press the key In response a description of the error
52. RF Level R amp S SMB RF Level Note The message Level overrange underrange appears in the info line if the set level Level is in the overrange or underrange see data sheet The correct level setting cannot be guaranteed for the entire frequency range if the set level is in the overrange underrange The simplest way to set the RF level is to enter it directly in the header of the display Lewel 30 00 dBm The entry is activated by pressing the key Changes to the level have an immediate effect without confirmation with the Enter key on the output signal Remote control command SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 30 dBm Note The GPIB command sets the level of the Level display i e an entered level offset is taken into consideration in the level value see below dBm dBuV mV and uV can be used as the level units The 4 unit keys are labeled with these units The level entered and displayed in the Level field takes the offset of any downstream attenuators amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation This means that with a level offset the level displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF output but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered The R amp S SMB Signal Generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset However the level entered and displayed in the Level menu of t
53. RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 45 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep The assignment of the IEC IEEE bus commands to the sweep modes is given in the description of the sweep menus Parameters AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered individually either by varying the Current Frequency value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a LFOutput FREQ MAN command under remote control With manual control the frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value specified under SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing With remote control the frequency increases by the value specified under LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG which each sent LFO FREQ MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each trigger triggers one sweep step only The frequency increases by the value entered under SOURce LFOutput SWEep STEP Example LFO SWE MODE AUTO selects auto mode SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in an LF sweep The command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP as follows T
54. SYST COMM NETW RES Response TCP IPs 1 Zi E OTIR plo COMM USB RES Response WSBe 272320000002 INSTR Protection Setup Protection The Protection menu provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only To deactivate the protection the correct password has to be entered After the instrument has been switched on the protection levels 1 to 5 are automatically activated 1407 0806 32 4 16 E 2 R amp S SMB Switching to Manual Control Local Key Protection Level 1 can be deactivated to expand the functionality of the internal adjustment to change the host name and to access the self tests see service manual The password is 123456 Prot Level 1 I On ia Prot Level2 KR On PWD zssrmzses Prot Level3 KR On PWD zssrmzses Prot Level 4 KR On PWD zsm Prot Level 5 KR On PWD e e200 Remote control command SYST PROT1 STAT ON SYST PROT1 STAT OFF 123456 Save Recall Setup Setting The Save Recall submenu can also be called up with the key and is therefore described in the section on this key see section Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key page 4 19 Help Setup Help The Help submenu offers comprehensive online help for the R amp S SMB Signal Generator A desired topic can be selected via the table of contents select Manual or the index select Index For context sensitive information about a marked parameter pres
55. Settings Mode Auto sl Fixed Range In 5 80 10 20 dEm User Variation Variation Active E 100 dB Variation Step The offset free level attenuation mode level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the menu RES E AE EENE Sets the RF level of the RF output connector The level entered and displayed here corresponds to the level at the RF output i e any offset entry is not taken into consideration Remote control command n a Note There is no GPIB command available for this setting The GPIB command SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL sets the level of the Level display i e the level containing offset 1407 0806 32 4 33 E 2 RF Level R amp S SMB ER EES Sets the level limit The value specifies the upper limit of the level at the RF output connector A message appears if an attempt is made to set a level above this limit and the level at the RF output is confined to the upper limit However the level indication is not influenced Remote control command SOUR POW LIM AMPL 30 dBm ENET SEENE RENE Sets the level offset relative to the RF level The level offset of a downstream instrument e g an attenuator or amplifier is entered The entry does not change the RF level at the RF output It only changes the RF level displayed in the display header the RF level in the header corresponds to the level at the output of the downstream instrument Remote control command SOUR POW LEV I
56. Step 3 Set frequency and level and activate RF signal Fred _RFOFF i a T a Ka CH gt E lt A el JE 3 EEE T lt D ISCH Press the key to activate the editing mode for frequency entry The frequency entry field in the header section of the display is highlighted 3000 am z Enter the level of the desired RF carrier in the same way after pressing the key 1407 0812 62 2 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Example of Setup Freq Level 7 000 000 000 0 st 30 00 an z LF ON OFF TOGGLE RE Select the RF block by turning the rotary knob and activate it by pressing the key The AM modulation signal is now present at the RF output 1407 0812 62 2 E 2 Example of Setup R amp S SMB Generation of an RF Frequency Sweep Signal In the example an RF frequency sweep is configured Proceed as described below 1 Activate default preset state 2 Configure and activate RF frequency sweep The settings are start frequency 100 MHz stop frequency 500 MHz linear spacing with a step width of 1 MHz dwell time 10 ms single sweep mode 3 Activate RF signal 4 Trigger single sweep Step 1 Activate default preset state Freq RF OFF MODOFF Level 1 000 000 000 0 erz 1 30 00 een z ALC S amp H Info Set a defined instrument state by pressing the PRESET key Modulation config IT On Step 2 Configure and activate RF frequency sweep
57. The arrow keys up down Rotary knob and arrow keys move the cursor only within up down move the cursor the selected menu area only within the selected menu area Exits a menu area Press the key Press the Enter key The menu area is exited by setting the cursor on an item outside the area Rotary knob or arrow keys The arrow keys move the move the cursor between cursor between different different menu areas menu areas Entering a Value Setting Parameters Numeric and alphanumeric values can be edited in the entry fields In the overwrite editing mode is used Numeric values can either be newly entered or the existing value can be varied Incorrect entries are cleared with the BACK SPACE key e Entering a new value A click on a numeric key activates the editing mode The previous value is cleared and the new value can be entered Dwell Time 10 000 ms well Time d ms e Variation Clicking the rotary knob Enter activates the editing mode Set the cursor to the left of the number to be changed using the left right arrow keys The value at the cursor position is varied An increase or decrease of the value depends on the cursor used up down or on the direction of rotation of the rotary Knob BEES 10 000 ms e Pwel Time 10 080 ms e Alphanumeric values can be newly entered e g file name 1407 0812 62 3 13 E 2 Setting Parameters New entry The entry is started by clicking an alpha
58. WEE SOURce PM DEViation 0 20 RAD The command sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet The deviation of the internal source must not exceed the deviation of the external source in case of modulation source Int Ext PM SOURce INT EXT Example PM 5E3 sets the PM modulation deviation to 5 RAD RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 RAD See datasheet Compliant SOURce PM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input EXT MOD in the case of phase modulation Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT can be set independently for modulations FM and PhiM Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example PM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external phase modulation RST value Resolution Options SCPI AC Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 63 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce PM EXTernal DEViation 0 20 RAD The command sets the modulation deviation in case of external phase modulation in RAD The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Example PM 5E3 sets the PM modulation deviation for external phase modulation of 5 RAD RST value Resolu
59. after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Remote control command n a the list is automatically saved after the values have been entered Expands the menu with the area for import and export of user correction files Externally edited Excel tables with frequency level pairs can be imported as text or CSV files and used for user correction On the other hand internally created user correction list can be exported as text or CSV files 4 41 E 2 User Correction Mode User Correction Extension User Correction Decimal Point User Correction Column Separator User Correction Select ASCII Source Destination User Correction 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Import Export List Files import ASCII File Settings TXT z Decimal Point Point Column Separator Semicolon Select ASCII Source Select Destination Import Extension None None Selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported The settings offered depend on the selected mode Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC MODE IMP Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Remot
60. amp S SMB Command Description SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SELect lt ascii_file_ name gt The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORREDEXC TAFIL OEL t vary rs gen ucor Inport UC Or csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORRI DEXC TOEL var rs jgen ucor import ucor imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor_imp po Bevice specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe The command selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR SDEXC TAP IEG SEL T wars ts Gen7ucor 1 moore Eeer esy selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator
61. and transferred into user correction lists CORRS DEXC TAP TILeGEI E Wwary rs cen ucor imporl ucor lt csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXC SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor_imp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor_imp CORR DEXC EXEC starts the import of the ASCII file data into the user correction file PT Yi pci 1407 0806 32 6 30 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce CORRection DEXChange MODE IMPort EXPort The command selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported Depending on the selection her the file select command define either the source or the destination for user correction lists and ASCII files Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORRE DEXC AFIL SEL bh van rs cen ucor 1 moore ucor esy selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR SDEXC PSR var rs gen iucor import ucor ime selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor_imp pL Bevice specific SOURce CORRection DEXChange SELect lt list_name gt The command selects the user correction list to be imported or exported The user correction files are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands
62. as in this case the sequence in which they are sent is irrelevant For further examples on command sequence see section Command Sequence and Command Synchronization on page 5 20 Before passing on the data to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set see section Status Reporting System page 5 23 The hardware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has settled This fact can be used to synchronize command Servicing Queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit on request The exact structure and function are described in section Status Reporting System Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data set management It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data are sent on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI Command Sequence and Command Synchronization IEEE 488 2
63. be opened by selecting an entry Back link The Back link calls up the page last viewed Internal links in the text They open pages which are directly linked to the described function In this way it is possible for example to call up the description of the IEC IEEE bus command for any particular function Previous Next links The Previous Next links allow scroll through the help pages The sequence of the described functions corresponds to their position in the menus The links are highlighted in blue and can be selected and called up using the rotary knob 1407 0806 32 4 18 E 2 R amp S SMB Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key The Signal Generator allows complete instrument settings to be stored in files on the CompactFlash Card Defined and complex instrument settings can then be reproduced at any time by loading this data If required these settings can be loaded to various signal generators The key open the menu used to store and load instrument settings in a file The data can be stored on the CompactFlash Card in a data directory Additionally there are three intermediate memories in which the current instrument setting can be stored and then called up again by just pressing a key This makes it possible to switch quickly between defined instrument settings All settings which differ from the preset plus the configuration data for the operating elements e g
64. below The mode setting is Static Point to Point Connection To build a simple network just a LAN connection between the R amp S SMB and a controller without integration into a larger network an IP address has to be assigned to the R amp S SMB and the controller For such purposes the IP addresses 192 168 xxx yyy are available The value range for xxx and yyy is 1 254 the value for the subnet mask is always 255 255 255 0 The gateway IP address must also be provided however it is without relevance The mode seiting is Peer To Peer Example R amp S SMB IP address 192 168 0 2 PC IP address 192 168 0 1 gateway IP address 192 168 0 3 For this type of connection a commercial cross over RJ 45 cable is used Identifying the R amp S SMB in the Network 1 Open the Setup menu by pressing the Setup key 2 Click Network Settings menu in the Environment section 3 Select the IP address mode and enter the network data in the respective fields of the menu The data is provided by the network administrator The Computer name is indicated in the Hostname field The name can be changed 1407 0812 62 1 20 E 2 R amp S SMB Remote Access via an External Controller Remote Access via an External Controller The R amp S SMB can be remote accessed from an external PC via a network link This allows convenient operation of the signal generator from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else Remote
65. better signal noise ratio but reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth and deviation see data sheet High Deviation mode with full setting range for FM deviation and a reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth see data sheet Note It is not possible to use frequency modulation simultaneously with phase modulation Frequency Modulation Menu The Frequency Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the key under Mod Modulation Amplitude Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation is switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources 1407 0806 32 4 65 E 2 Frequency Modulation FM FM Source Jint Ext gt FM Mode Normal FM Deviation 1 00000 kHz FM Sensitivity 1000 00 Hz Volt Adjust FM Offset Mod Ext Coupling Ac FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 16 000 0 kHz LFGen Shape Sine State FM R amp S SMB Activates deactivates FM modulation Activation of FM deactivates phase modulation Remote control command SOUR EM STAT ON FM Source FM Selects the
66. by the command SOURce POWer MODE SWEep All sweeps including the LF sweep can be set independently of each other The keyword SOURGe is optional with commands and can be omitted A sweep is set in several steps which are shown below taking a frequency sweep as an example 1 Set the sweep range SOURce FREQuency CENTer 200 MHz SOURce FREQuency SPAN 300 MHz 2 Select linear or logarithmic spacing SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN oO Set the step width and dwell time SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 20 MHz SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 12 ms 4 Select the trigger mode TRIiIGger FSWeep SOURce SINGle 5 Select the sweep mode and activate the sweep SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep 6 Trigger the sweep SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECute Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF ae TT SO Pe JSWE apt FREGuenoyFOWEL SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECute e ed SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear 0 STOP STAR Hz SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts ISOURGeISWEepPOWereXEGue SOSCSC dSCSCSCSSSSS ISOURGesWEep POWerMODE aomas IsOURGeSWEep POWerPONS Losse 1souRceJswEeprowerseacnanooe oww ISOUR
67. case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message Is displayed Remote control command SOUR PM DEV 2 5 SOUR PM EXT DEV 2 5 4 70 E 2 R amp S SMB PhiM Sensitivity PhiM External Coupling LF Gen Freg PhiM LF Gen Shape PhiM 1407 0806 32 Phase Modulation PhiM Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD MOD input in RAD V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under PhiM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Note The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 V otherwise modulation distortions might occur Remote control command SOUR PM SENS Source External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source AC The DC voltage content is separated from the modulation signal Remote control command SOUR PM EXT COUP AC DC The modulation signal is not altered Remote control command SOUR PM EXT COUP DC Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Source Internal Selects the shape of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO SHAP SQU 4 71 E 2 Pulse Modulation R amp S SMB Pulse Modulation External and internal Pulse modulation requires options R amp S SMB K22 Pulse Modulator and R amp S SMB K23
68. cccseeeeeees 3 15 Terminating Entries Setting Parametere 3 16 Restoring the Previous Value Setting PDarameiers 3 16 Menu ere EE 3 17 CLO NS ssceresconsesnCarsstcosaianarccs mance saitacnsumserantersenmteumanancenancanasaroresa meacaasei cusuuaaeais 3 18 Bn el 3 18 ICID SY SOM EE 3 20 PC IMAM AG CIN e EE 3 21 File Select Men 3 22 PIC VIAN AG CM E 3 23 FICMOLS ACCOS EE 3 24 Legend of Front Panel Controls A 3 25 Front Panel Key En el 3 26 3 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Manual Operation 3 Manual Operation Introduction Manual Operation The Signal Generator R amp S SMB can be operated intuitively either via the interactive block diagram or via a menu tree All menus are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way Rotary knob keys and softkeys or alternatively a mouse allow direct and therefore convenient access to entries and settings The clear cut display shows the current signal generator state Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration The following chapter describes manual operation of the signal generator This includes a description of screenshots operation of menus and the block diagram and the setting of parameters Chapter 4 includes a detailed description of signal generator functions Chapter 2 explains the operating concept in general and includes a brief introduction to operation by a step by step description of the configuration Remote control of the instrument is d
69. command SYST ERR Or STAT QUE Each time a SYSTem ERRor Or STATus QUEue query is sent the oldest entry in the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared in the list 1407 0812 62 3 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Display Block Diagram Display The block diagram shows provided options signal configuration and the currently selected signal flow of the generator with inputs and outputs used Signal generation can be completely operated from the block diagram The highlighted function block can be directly switched on and off with the key Clicking the rotary knob Enter opens the associated setting menu LF MOD E E E Function Blocks in the Block Diagram Each block represents a function of signal generation The function is indicated in the headline of the block e g Mod In this block the modulation signals are set for instance In the check box yon the respective function can be quickly activated deactivated with the key After activation the block is displayed in blue Status information is displayed below the check box It is different for the different blocks In the Mod block for instance the selected modulation is indicated Clicking the rotary knob front panel or the config button mouse opens the associated setting menu Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod Signal Flow and Input Output Symbols in the Block Diagram The input output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used
70. command column the table provides an overview of the commands Parameter The parameter column indicates the requested parameters together with their specified range Unit The unit column indicates the basic unit of the physical parameters Remark In the remark column an indication is made on whether the command does not have a query form whether the command has only one query form Individual description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options that are required to execute the command are listed In case of dependencies between commands they are also indicated Upper lower case notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description see Chapter 5 The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the frequency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 KHz
71. command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example LFO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 1 kHz LFO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 100 kHz LFO SWE SPAC LOG sets logarithmic sweep spacing LFO SWE STEP LOG 10PCT sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 of the previous frequency in each instance RST value Resolution Options Correlation 1 PCT 0 01 PCT The value of LFO SWE POIN is adjusted automatically SOURce LFOutput VOLTage ON AN The command sets the output voltage of the LF output Example LPO VOMIT o V sets the voltage of the LF output to 3 V Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1407 0806 32 6 48 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for the List mode of the instrument The following settings are required to operate the instrument in List mode 1 Create a list If a list which does not exist is selected with the LIST SEL command an empty list with the name of the selected list is created SOURCGElLALIEST SEL New list 2 Fill the list with values All list
72. command triggers voltage measurement at the specified test point and returns the measured voltage A description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument A list of the available test points can be queried using the DIAG POIN CAT command Example DIAG POIN DIAG _SMB_BAB_P7V triggers measurement at the test point DIAG_SMB_BAB_P7V Response 0 5 the voltage at the test point is 0 5 volt RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 9 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB DISPlay Subsystem The DISPlay system contains the commands to set the power save mode of the instrument vemmens TT Ek DISPlay PSAVe STATe ON OFF i DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff 1 60 This command sets the wait time for the screen save mode of the display The available value range is 1 to 60 minutes the resolution 1 minute The entry is dimensionless Example DISP PSAV HOLD 10 sets the wait for the screen saver mode to 10 minutes RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 Device specific DISPlay PSAVe STATe ON OFF This command activates deactivates the screen save mode of the display With the screen save mode activated the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of the wait time see command DISPlay PSAVe HOLDoff when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboar
73. control command n a Selects the directory in which the file is to be stored The window opposite lists all settings files in this directory A new directory can be created in the File Manager File Manager button Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user The path can also be entered when the file is stored Displays the files which are in the selected directory If a file is highlighted it is overwritten when the file is stored Remote control command MMEM CAT Enter the file name of the file without file extension This file is then created Remote control command n a The file name is entered when the file is stored Stores the current instrument settings under the specified path Remote control command RER 1 4 20 E 2 R amp S SMB Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key Save Immediate x Stores the current instrument setting in one of the three intermediate memories These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the intermediate memory When the instrument is switched off the contents of the intermediate memories are retained Remote control command SAV 1 File Management Calls the File Management menu Directories can be created and files managed in this menu see the section File Management File page 4 23 Remote control command n a Loading Instrument Settings File lf Recall is selected under Select Operation the Fi
74. entries of the list are ignored RST value Resolution Options SCPI 0 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 56 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST INDex STOP 0 list length The command sets the stop index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency level value pairs in the current list Only the values in the set index range LIST INDex STARt LIST INDex STOP are processed in List mode Example LISTSSEL vary lasts i2stmod y lists selects list3 for use in List mode LESTPIND STAR 25 sets 25 as start index of the index range LIST IND STOP 49 sets 49 as stop index of the index range FREQ MODE LIST activates List mode The frequency level value pairs from index 25 to index 49 in list8 are processed All other entries of the list are ignored RST value Resolution Options SCPI 0 Device specific SOURce LIST LEARn The command learns the selected list i e it determines the hardware setting for the entire list The data determined in this way is stored together with the list When the list is activated for the first time these settings are calculated automatically The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example ELST OEL De hi sts Aere listo T Selects 1ist3 List3 is created if it does not yet exist EN BN EC Starts learning of the hardware setting for 1ist3 and stores the setting RST value Resolution Options SCPI z Devic
75. ff The command sets the alternate DNS server address manually Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT the DNS server address is assigned manually SYST COMM NETW DNS ALT 7 8 9 10 sets the IP address of the alternate DNS server SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates the above settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS MODE STATic AUTO The command selects if the DNS server address is assigned automatically or manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET Parameters AUTO The DNS server address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function STATic The DNS server address is assigned manually Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE AUTO the DNS server address is assigned automatically DHCP SYST COMM NETW COMM SET ON activates DHCP RST value Resolution Options SCPI AUTO 7 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 90 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS PREFerred 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff The command sets the preferred DNS server address manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET Example SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT the DNS server address is assigned manually SYST SCOMM NETITW ZDNSS PREF 7402910 sets the IP address of the preferred DNS server SYST COMM NETW COMM S
76. front panel key functions are executed by a mouse click on the associated button 1407 0812 62 3 26 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Instrument Functions Contents Chapter 4 Instrument Functions EISES DEEN 4 1 General INSirument SS tig S vices cot cic atece kha tienes e a e a a 4 2 Overview of General Instrument Settings ccccccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesesaeeaeeeeeeeeesssseaeeeeess 4 2 Default Instrument Settings Preset key 4 2 General Configuration of Instrument Setup key 4 3 Internal Adjustments Setup Syste ccccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeseeeaseeeeeesseeaaeeeeeeseesaaas 4 4 Hardware Config Setup Systeri a a e 4 5 Gui U pate Setup SyS EE 4 5 Sotware r OPIOnN S SEUNS yS lE EE 4 6 Install SW Option Setup System 0 0 eee ceccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseceeeeeesaeeaseeeeeeesesaeaeeeeeeessaaas 4 7 Tesi Ge Un EE le KEE 4 7 Check Front Panel S tup TeSt 0c ccccecsccssesneceeeecccccesseneeceescccoesseneecenscoessseeeeensacceeseedenees 4 8 Security StuP ENVIPONMEN cccc c cseeeeeceeseccesseececencscccseseneeeeessseseeneeeeecececesenseeeencseccsederees 4 9 Date and Time Getup Emvironment concirne aaa aa aa aiaa aneii 4 11 Network Settings Getup Environment 4 11 USB Settings SEUD EEUEEIEEIEDE eege 4 15 Display Keyboard Settings Getup Emvironment 4 15 Remote Channel Settings Getup Hemoie 4 16 Protection SCTUD alte e e EE 4 16 Save Recall Se
77. instrument functions and remote control in addition to the chapters of the quick start guide It includes information about maintenance of the instrument and about error detection listing the error messages which may be output by the instrument It is sub divided into 10 chapters The data sheet informs about specifications and character istics of the instrument Chapter 1 describes the control elements and connec tors on the front and rear panel as well as all procedures required for putting the in strument into operation Chapter 2 gives an introduction to the operating con cept and typical applications of the R amp S SMB Chapter 3 describes key operating modes the struc ture of the graphical interface and the prin ciples of manual control 0 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Internet Site 1407 0812 62 User Documentation Chapter 4 forms a reference for manual control of the R amp S SMB and contains a detailed descrip tion of all instrument functions and their ap plication The chapter also lists the remote control command corresponding to each in strument function Remote Control Chapter 5 describes the basics for programming the R amp S SMB command processing and the status reporting system Chapter 6 lists all the remote control commands de fined for the instrument Chapter 7 Chapter 8 describes preventive maintenance and the characteristics of the instrument s inter faces Chapter 9 gives the statu
78. interpolation of the closest correction values OvenCold The reference oscillator has not yet reached its nominal frequency When switching on from the STANDBY mode the specified frequency accuracy is reached immediately If the power switch was switched off the reference oscillator needs some warm up time to reach its nominal frequency During this period of time the output frequency does not yet reach its final value either Error Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Volatile messages Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument e g switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Remote control command SYST PERR Or SYST ERRtALL Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs furth
79. message is output if the error queue does not contain entries Numeric data not allowed 128 The command contains a numeric data element the device does not accept in this position Example The command SOUR BB MCCW SEQ requires the indication of a text parameter SOUR BB MCCW SEQ AUTO SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Out of memory 225 The storage space available in the instrument is exhausted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Parameter not allowed 108 The command contains too many parameters Example Command SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency permits only one frequency indication FREQ CENT 30 kHz 40 kHz SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 7 E 2 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMB Program mnemonic too long 112 The header contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Queue overflow 350 This error code is entered into the queue instead of the actual error code if the queue Is full It indicates that an error has occurred but not been recorded in the queue The original error message is lost Remedy Reading out the error messages e g with command SYSTem ERRor ALL clears the error queue SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Query interrupted 410 This query has been interrupted Example After a query the instrument receives new da
80. mode AM ENT 4 64 6 23 Coupling mode FM PM ENT 4 68 4 71 Coupling mode MOD ENT 6 33 6 63 Create New Directory 0 naanannennanennane nenene annene 4 24 Lross OoverbhlAhcable 1 20 Current Freq LF Sweenl 4 80 6 43 Current Freq RF Zweenl 4 48 6 38 CUITENE EE 4 53 6 69 Eege 4 23 D DAA OX CNANO E 1 18 Data format block data 6 11 Data format query Commande 6 11 Data out of range 22 9 5 Data type Crror 702 9 5 Dale EE 4 11 6 94 DC coupling external EM 4 68 1407 0806 32 10 2 R amp S SMB eler EE 5 18 DOCIMI all ee 5 15 Decimal Point Import Export List Mode data 4 59 6 54 Decimal Point Imp Export User Corr data 4 42 6 30 Default instrument settings cccccceeeeeeeees 1 17 4 2 6 96 Delete instrument settings cccccccsseecseeeeneeeenes 4 24 6 18 EE Ee 5 18 DEI fe Ue Phasiinae Ee 4 29 6 62 Destination Import Export List Mode data 4 60 6 55 Destination Import Export User Corr data 4 43 6 31 Device specific error 2001 9 5 DHAOR eee A E E R 1 20 Digital modulation signal EM 4 65 DECOY EE 4 21 6 16 EE ee ee 3 4 DNS Server Address Address Auto Setup 4 14 6 90 Double dagger al 5 17 Double Pulse elo 4 74 6 73 Do ble EE 4 74 6 73 Double Pulse width 4 74 6 73 Driver initialization failed 204 cccccccccsseecesseeeeeneesenees 9 12 Dwell Time Level ween 4 53 6 81 Dwell Time LF Sween 4 80 6 45 Dwe
81. new unit Check box field lf the check box is ticked the associated parameter setting is active e g switched on Menu area Several fields of associated but separately set parameters can be organized in a menu area The menu area is framed and labelled with the function common to all parameters e g FM Source Buttons The buttons either trigger a single action e g Execute Single Sweep or call the next menu level to be identified by 3 dots e g User Correction Data 3 9 E 2 Setting Parameters R amp S SMB Setting Parameters The R amp S SMB offers several and sometimes alternative possibilities for setting parameters Operation is possible from the front panel with the aid of a mouse and or from a PC keyboard Operation of the R amp S SMB with the aid of these control media is shown in the tables below Frequency and level are directly set in the header area of the display using the and keys Some of the keys trigger a direct action e g the RF ON OFF key switches the RF output on and off An overview of key functions can be found at the end of this chapter see section Legend of Front Panel Controls page 3 25 a detailed description of key functions is given in chapter 4 nstrument Functions Most of the parameters are set in the menus Menus can be opened from the function blocks of the diagram either with the aid of the rotary knob Enter on the front panel or by a mouse click on the Config bu
82. not directly available on the keyboard can be substituted by key combinations or by the front panel key emulation panel see next section When the connection is set up direct control on the R amp S SMB is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the remote access For return to direct operation on the R amp S SMB the connection must be closed After closing the connection it is still enabled and can be established again any time see Chapter 1 section Remote Access via an External Controller 1407 0812 62 3 24 E 2 R amp S SMB Legend of Front Panel Controls Legend of Front Panel Controls The following table lists all key functions available on the front panel Key combinations used on the PC keyboard to trigger key functions on the instrument front panel are also described Keyboard labels are described in alphabetical order In addition a front panel key emulation and an on screen keyboard can be used for manual operation by mouse only see below Tab key towards the right Sets the cursor with the rotary knob Shift Tab towards the left Pressing the rotary knob confirms an entry it has the same function as the ENTER key SS EEE 1 dB m ALT F12 Confirms entries in the base unit and values without a unit Selects dBm for the RF level and dB for level offset and level step width ee ee H Enters a period decimal point Enters a special character
83. s is displayed see Chapter 9 Error Messages Besides automatic monitoring of instrument functions other capabilities in the R amp S SMB ensure correct functioning of the signal generator Internal Adjustments Adjustments can be performed in the Setup System Internal Adjustments menu Thus optimum modulation performance can be obtained for instance Test points Internal test points can be queried by the user and the results can be displayed See Chapter 4 section Test Point Setup Test Default Settings The instrument is set to a defined state with the key RF frequency 1 GHz RF level OFF Reference frequency internal adjustment off Offsets 0 Modulations switched off Uninterrupted level setting switched off level attenuator mode AUTO Internal level control Level ALC AUTO User correction Level Ucor OFF LF output switched off Sweep switched off IEC IEEE bus address not changed With PRESET all parameters and switch states are preset including those of deactivated operating modes Presettings beyond those in the above list can be seen from the RST values of the associated IEC IEEE bus commands 1407 0812 62 1 17 E 2 Linux Operating System R amp S SMB Linux Operating System ATTENTION Possible impairment of the functioning of the instrument The instrument is equipped with the Linux operating system It is thus possible to install COTS software in the instrument The use and installation of co
84. serial poll The STB is linked to the SRE Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a Service Request SRQ is generated on the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet which triggers an interrupt in the controller if this is appropriately configured and can be further processed there The SRE can be set using command SRE and read using SRE Meaning of the bits used in the status byte SE Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a Service Request Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with Remote control MAV bit Message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register MSS bit Master Status Summ
85. server is used if the DNS server specified in Preferred DNS Server is unreachable The new entry is only accepted and the alternate DNS server address changed after the Accept button Is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS ALT 7 8 9 10 4 14 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings USB Settings Setup Environment The USB Mass Storage Settings menu allows to activate or deactivate connected USB mass storage devices It is opened using the or key under Environment m 4H 55 STORAGE DEWIGE Ed Unmount USB Mass Storage Device Mount USB Mass Storage Device Activates a connected USB mass storage device memory stick external harddisk or CD ROM Only one device can be connected at a time Remote control command n a Unmount USB Mass Storage Device Deactivates a connected USB mass storage device memory stick external harddisk or CD ROM The interface is protected against unadverted input Remote control command n a Display Keyboard Settings Setup Environment The Display and the Keyboard Settings menu provides access to the settings for the display and an external keyboard It is opened using the or key under Environment The keyboard is connected via an USB interface Screen Saver Activates deactivates the screen saver of the instrument display If activated the display lamp is shut off when no entries via front panel external mouse or external keyboard are made for a per
86. sets the modulation depth for the two LF generators The sum of the two values must not exceed the overall modulation depth set in the upper part of the menu Example AM INT 15PCT sets the AM modulation depth to 15 percent RST value Resolution Options SCPI 15 PCT See data sheet Compliant SOURce AM SENSitivity The command queries the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR AM SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation depth setting SOUR AM DEP Th This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example AM DEPT 50 sets a modulation depth of 50 AM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the MOD EXT input Response 50 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50 V RST value Resolution Options SCPI g S Compliant SOURce JAM SOURce EXT INT INT EXT The command selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation INT is the internal modulation source and is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Internal and external modulation source can be selected at the same time Example AM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source RST value Resolution Options SCPI INTernal Compliant
87. system is performed accordingly Configuration for Remote Access via Ultr VNC The instrument is operated with the aid of the program UItr VNC It is available as a free of charge download on the internet for operating system Window XP http Awww uvnc com download index html and on the R amp S SMB CD ROM Remote access of the signal generator is possible under the following conditions The external PC with Linux Unix or Windows operating system Windows 95 or higher is equipped with a LAN interface which is configured for the network The signal generator and PC are linked via a LAN A user specific password for the VNC connection is defined on the R amp S SMB The default password is instrument it can be changed in the Environment Security section of the Setup menu The Ultr VNC Viewer software is installed on the external PC or any other VNC client R amp S SMB IP address and the user specific password for the VNC connection are entered in the VNC Viewer panel 1407 0812 62 1 21 E 2 Remote Access via an External Controller Install VNC Viewer and Establish VNC Connection on the Windows PC ATTENTION Risk of unauthorized access After enabling the VNC connection any user on the network who knows the password and IP address of the signal generator can access this R amp S SMB Even after cutting it the connection is still enabled and the R amp S SMB can be accessed any time To disable the connection the VNC pro
88. the cleaning of the instrument ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dust cloth The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time it must be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective covers at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage 1407 0806 32 8 1 E 2 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMB Hardware Interfaces The following section describes the remote control interfaces of the signal generator All other interfaces are described in Chapter 1 sections Legend for Front Panel View and Legend for Rear Panel View For specifications refer to the data sheet IEC IEEE Bus Interface The standard instrument is equipped with an IEC IEEE bus connector An IEEE 488 interface connector is located on the rear panel An external controller for remote control
89. the frequency values UP DOWN The command is linked to the command Variation Active for manual control i e the command also activates deactivates the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the rotary knob Example FREQ STEP 50 kHz sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50 KHz FREQ OTEP MODE USER actives this step width for frequency variation with the rotary knob manual control and with frequency values UP DOWN remote control RST value Resolution Options SCPI DECimal Device specific SOURce FREQuency STOP 300 kHz RF max RFmax depending on model This command sets the stop frequency for the sweep mode STOP can be less than STARt This command is linked to the commands SOUR FREQ CENt and SOUR FREQ SPAN L changing these values causes the STARt value to change and vice versa STOP CENTer SPAN 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if OFFSet Is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 KHz OFFSet RFma OF FSet Example FREQ STOP 2 GHz sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz FREQ STAR 1 MHz sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz RST value Options Correlation SCPI 500 MHz STOP CENTer SPAN 2 Co
90. the menu on a yellow background This indicates that the currently displayed values do not represent the desired signal All settings of instrument functions that can be switched on and off are calculated and effective only after this function has been switched on This applies to most settings on the R amp S SMB An exception is for instance the frequency variation of the reference oscillator which is immediately set after confirmation Accepts value immediately Vary the value using the rotary Vary the value with the knob or the up down arrow keys up down arrow keys Confirms entries Press rotary knob or ENTER key Press Enter key Exit entry field or or press key one of the key combinations D ALT F9 F10 F11 F12 Confirms entries in the Press Accept button Select Accept button with Click Accept buiton menus with the Accept the arrow keys and press button Enter Sets the entries in the If the instrument function is active see front panel see front panel instrument the new value is immediately calculated and set If the instrument function is not active the new confirmed value is calculated and set only when the function is switched on Restoring the Previous Value Setting Parameters Parameter variations with the rotary knob are immediately set and therefore not reversible Normally values cannot be restored also in the case of mouse control because no explicit confirmation is required in this
91. the output eis Lei SERGE e Mixer P gt of the instrument RF output frequency Freq in the header Frequency in the Frequency menu area of the screen The frequency offset is entered in the Frequency menu Here it is also possible to set the frequency without taking the offset into consideration to set the step width for the frequency entry using the rotary knob and to set the phase for the RF output signal 1407 0806 32 4 26 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Signal RF Frequency Menu The Frequency menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF BE Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep Frequency and offset of the RF output signal is set in the upper part of the group menu The step width which is used when setting the frequency using the rotary knob with Variation Active On is set in the User Variation section Frequency 1 000 000 000 00 GHZ l 0 000 000 000 00 GHz sl User Variation Variation Active Variation Step 1 000 000 00 MHz The lower parts concern the phase settings for the output signal and are described in the section RF Phase page 4 29 The frequency and offset are set in the top section of the menu Frequency RF Signal Sets the RF frequency of the RF output connector The frequency entered and displayed here corresponds to the frequency at the RF output Le any offset entry is not taken into c
92. window positions are stored When loaded these referenced settings are implemented and all non referenced parameters are set to the associated preset value As a result the files remain relatively small since they only contain the relevant information Furthermore this also allows instrument settings to be transferred easily between different signal generators since once again only the settings which differ from the preset values have to be adjusted If a list e g a frequency level list is used for a list of user correction data a reference to this list also stored The list is also loaded when the associated instrument setting is loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime or it is not available on a different instrument an error message appears if an attempt is made to access this list after the instrument setting has been loaded The associated setting or operating mode is only started after the user has selected an existing list If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used Note Lists are stored and loaded in the appropriate menus For example the user correction data list is created and stored in the User Correction menu When loading an instrument setting it is possible to select whether the current frequency and level setting is to be retained or whether the stored settings are to be activated It is possible to delete stored instrument settings A file can be copied by loading it with
93. with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if OFFSet Is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula see also Chapter 4 STARE ORFSEC rO TOP FOFF eC Example SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode FREQ MAN 500MHz sets an RF frequency of 500 MHz for the next step in the Step sweep mode FREQ MODE SWE sets the Frequency Sweep mode An RF frequency of 500 MHz is output FREQ MAN 550MHz triggers the next sweep step with an RF frequency of 550 MHz Compliant Options SCPI SOURce FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output frequency Parameters CW FlXed The instrument operates in fixed frequency mode CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is set with SOURce FREQuency CW FIXed SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The frequency is set using the commands SOURce FREQuency STARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual Example FREQ MODE SWE sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce FREQuency STARt STOP CENTer SPAN MANual become effective RST value Correlation SCPI CW FREQ MODE LIST sets Compliant POW MODE LIST 1407 0806 32 6 38 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 50 GHz 50 GHz The command sets the frequency offset of a downconversion instrument e g a mixer See Chapter
94. 1 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Legend for Rear Panel View Legend for Rear Panel View This section gives an overview of connectors on the rear panel of the R amp S SMB Each connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet 1 2 3 4 5 6 T j K i IEEE 488 USB IN USB LAN S sae A K lt E Ft F2 1EC 127 T 3 15 H 250V 100 240 VAC S50 60Hz 14 0 6A ER ANGS e PULSE PULSE INST SIGNAL eg REFIN REFOUT EXT VIDEO TRIG e LR t4 e ice 2 gt oe O VALID gt LC G CGF R Sg L I Ka d SMB B1 Q 0 o 0 a OCXO N 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Fig 1 2 Rear panel view Fuses See chapter 1 section The R amp S SMB is fully fused by two hp S ane fuses IEC127 1T3 15H 250 V AC supply connector See chapter 1 section l Connecting the When the R amp S SMB S connected to R amp S SMB to the AC the AC supply it automatically sets Supply and data itself to the correct range for the sheet applied voltage range see type Power Power label There is no need to set the switch connector voltage manually or change fuses Power switch 1407 0812 62 1 9 E 2 Legend for Rear Panel View R amp S SMB 3 USB interface type B USB IN USB universal serial bus interface of See chapter 8 section
95. 2 6 49 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB iat SOURce LIST DEXChange AFILe SEParator COLumn TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe SOURGeILSTDEXChange AFiLeSEParatocDeGimal DOT COMMa ISOURGeILIST DEXChangeeXecue ll oo ogect rengeecnt meone JI PISOURGeILIST DEXChange SELect asmoen JI osetEImg fes o o 300kHz RF max block data model ISOURCEILISTFREQuencyPONS O OO oeo oupesl tfegin foce IS0URseJSTINDeesToP Liebl SouRcequstrean O O OOO y y OO i y Y O Opel O o famose 30 dBm block data isouncesuistPowerrons J omw souremsraese OOOO O OoOo OO o S OS sounets E EE RE EE f EE SOURce LIST TRIGger SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle BUS EXTernal SOURce LIST CATalog The command requests a list of available lists The individual lists are separated by commas The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions Isw in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST CAT in which case the files in the specified directory are read The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists listmode selects the directory for the list mode files BICEP AT queries the available lists Response list1 list2 the lists List1 and list2 are available SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 50 E 2
96. 3 Enabled l Tells whether this device is enabled o DI Software Delete Host Address 89 1 2 118 Name of the host for this device wh gt On the viWrite tab under Basic I O commands can be sent to the instrument instrument responses are displayed on the viRead tab for further program operation refer to the online help of the program 1407 0806 32 Sf E 2 Switchover to Remote Control R amp S SMB TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTR Session 0200140688 Template Basic 1 0 Interface o viw iteFromFile viReadT oFile viv rite veel vidssertT rigger vifieadS TB viClear Butter apateni eror all An EI El Return Count Asyne 18 Retur Value R U Write data to a message based bus or device Execute Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the LAN interface Manually gt Press the key Notes The key can be disabled by the universal command amp LLO see Section JEC IEEE Bus Messages in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is only possible via remote control The key can be enabled again by the interface message amp NREN see Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generator Get instrument to manual operation Remote Control via USB Interface For remote control via the the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed on the
97. 407 0806 32 5 10 E 2 R amp S SMB SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Device specific commands Hierarchy Device specific commands are of hierarchical structure see figure below The different levels are represented by combined headers Headers of the highest level root level have only one key word This key word denotes a complete command system Example SOURce This key word denotes the command system SOURce For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Example sSOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC This command lies in the fourth level of the SOURce It sets the coupling of the external signal source to AC Example for the tree structure of the SCPI command systems the SOURce system Multiple key words Some key words occur on several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command i e on the position in the command header they are inserted in Example SOURce FM POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the third command level It defines the polarity between modulator and modulation signal SOURce FM EXTernal POLarity NORMal This command contains key word POLarity in the fourth command level It defines the polarity between modulation voltage and the resulting direction of the modulation only for the external signal source indicated
98. 48 EP generator ee E 4 76 6 42 EF OUD eege 4 76 6 42 LF OUDS IAE ee 4 81 6 45 LF SWCD EE 4 80 6 44 EE TEEN sees ee 4 82 LE GEN ZSHADC EE 6 44 DIPS WGI sci ee eege 9 2 E 2 Index Licence for software option 4 7 Limit ENEE EEN 4 34 6 69 LUV EE 1 18 Linux Gee 0 116 ee 1 21 REES E EE 4 54 6 49 LIST mode manual processing Of leie 4 56 List Mode Data EE 4 58 LISP RONG C EE 4 59 6 56 6 57 Lists not same length t2Z2el 9 7 Load instrument settings ccccccecsseeeeseeeseeeeeeees 4 21 6 4 ele 4 17 5 3 5 8 Local to remote switchover 5 2 LOCK KEV DOGIO EE 6 96 POWER CASO resis ee Ae eeneg 6 1 Lowercoasetcommendesl 5 12 M MAC Address ein 4 12 6 93 WAIT ON GINCE EE 8 1 Mantis saa ee 5 15 Manual control switch over 4 17 Manual operation VOTO EE 5 3 5 8 Manual remote contre 1 21 Maximal deviation EM 4 67 6 33 Maximal deviation PRIM 00 cccccccccecceccneseeees 4 70 6 63 6 64 Men ALOE dee Ee 3 9 EECHELEN renoier E dt 3 8 Missing parameter 7001 9 7 MOG GEN ee 2 2 MOD OF cise ini eebe 9 1 Mod EE 4 66 6 3 Mode Level Sween 4 51 6 70 6 82 Mode LF GOR EEN 4 77 6 43 Mode LF Sween 4 77 6 43 6 46 Mode List Moge ege Ee abe Bie D ESeEE 4 55 6 57 MOE PRIM neice oie 4 70 6 64 Mode RF Frequency ccccccssccsssccsscenseenseennes 4 45 6 38 Mode RF Sweep EE 4 45 6 38 6 79 Mode Import Export List Mode data 4 59 6 55 Mode Import Export User Correction data
99. 5 Expression data not allowed RK Ka WEE 9 5 GEF not allowed 21 OS xis egies Gere eee eee ea en en adc ee ee ee eee 9 5 wee Clon 240 EE 9 5 Hardware MISSING 2241 DEE 9 6 Header suffix out Of range 7114 9 6 legal parameter value 224 9 6 invalid blOCk Gata 2161 E 9 6 nvValich Gharacter Et KEE 9 6 vaid ee tee NOS EE 9 6 Hvad Sune TST WEE 9 7 Liste notsame length 226 EEN 9 7 MISSING parameter VOD rars aA 9 7 INO 2S OW EE 9 7 Numeric data not allowed 128 9 7 Ouro memory e Seege EE Zeg 9 7 Parameter not allowed 108 ccissesciec sss we scarcer steticceseiesethossideet ivlevbindcdiaeieathtaicielcbeecdackteehees 9 7 Program IMAeCMOnIG LOG ION Eh KEE 9 8 QUEUS OVETHOW ee eeh eebe Eege 9 8 EENEG 9 8 CUE unerminated 24 20 actus aciecn acta canta a Tearnt cca muah EA 9 8 Query deadlocked 430 EE 9 8 Sell TEST fale ss BGO oera esas nee eon alee a eae een a 9 8 SSMMOS COMC taa E221 EE 9 9 String data not allowed 718 9 9 SUMIXANOL AUOWEO TIG EE 9 9 SUNIX TOO MOM 18 EE 9 9 SYMA ENON 1 OZ Vier aisk held rere a a a ones 9 9 1407 0806 32 ECK E 2 Contents Error Messages R amp S SMB Sy tem enor ER LA EE 9 9 TOON digis E E osaa 9 9 TOO UGCA 223 ET 9 10 Undelinedheader TiS EEN 9 10 Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeneeesneeeeeeeennns 9 11 Ad USIMENt data invald AE E EE 9 11 Adjustment data MISSING 872 9 11 Adjustment failed 90 9 11 C
100. 8 Central Quality Management MF QZ Radde 1406 6000 02 CE E 1 R amp S SMB User Documentation Contents of User Documentation for Signal Generator R amp S SMB The user documentation describes the Signal Generator R amp S SMB and all options It includes a printed Quick Start Guide and a CD ROM with the complete operating and service manual in printable pdf format The R amp S SMB is equipped with a context sensitive online help that offers a help page for each instru ment function Quick Start Guide The present quick start guide describes everything that is needed to put the instrument into operation and to get familiar with the generator The quick start guide gives an introduction to remote control and manual control via external monitor mouse and key board The quick start guide is subdivided into the data sheet plus 3 chapters plus index The data sheet informs about specifications and characteristics of the instrument Chapter 1 Describes the control elements and connectors on the front and rear panel as well as all proce dures required for putting the instrument into operation Chapter 2 Gives an introduction the operating concept and typical applications of the R amp S SMB Chapter 3 Describes key operating modes the structure of the graphical interface and the principles of manual control Annex Contains an index for the quick start guide Help System ARO B ajajaa voou B Sleieretzk
101. 9 8 350 Queue overflow ccceseccsseescecsseeeeseeeseessasenseenes 9 8 4 410 Query deadlocked 9 8 410 Query mterrupted 00 0 ececeseeceenneeecneeeeeaneeeeseseesanees 9 8 410 Query unterminated ccceeecesseeecesseeeenneeecneneesanees 9 8 460 Cannot open le 9 12 461 Cannot writeie 9 12 462 Cannot read file aanaaanaannannnnnnnaannnnnnannnnnanneane 9 12 463 Filename MISSING ENEE 9 12 464 Invalid filename exviension 9 13 465 File contains invalid date 9 12 A PID OI DUN OR EE 3 15 Aborting a CalCUlaliON EE 3 15 Accept Network Zeitgs 0000a0eaanneanneannnennnnennnnnane 4 12 AC coupling external FM 1ccccssssecsssseeneeeeseaneeesneneees 4 68 AGUSTA EE 4 4 6 6 tele Ree 4 67 6 6 Adjust FM PhiIM Modulator 6 6 ee EE 6 7 Adjust ee 4 4 6 6 Adjustment ACTIVE ANEN 4 31 6 76 Adjustment data invalid 67 9 11 Adjustment data MISSING TG 9 11 Adjustment failed GO 9 11 Adjustment Freguenck 4 31 6 76 Adjustment value Reference frequency 4 31 6 76 ALC automatic level contra 4 37 6 66 ALC AAO EE 9 2 EE 9 2 ALCO E 4 37 9 2 PUSH SHA Sia ee ek S Ea ei maa 9 2 Alternate DNS Server Address Setup 6 90 AM Ee 4 63 6 23 AM ee EE 6 24 EE 4 64 6 23 AM TCQUCNICY ER 4 64 6 43 AM Sensitivity EE 4 64 6 24 AM SHADE Eeer eet 4 64 6 44 AM EE EEN 4 63 6 24 e Re 4 63 6 24 Architecture Of R amp S SM 2 1 ASCII file import export List Mode 1cc
102. A a Select the RF block by turning the rotary knob 1407 0812 62 2 8 E 2 R amp S SMB Press the rotary knob to open the menu where the RF frequency sweep menu can be selected A 2 Highlight RF Freq Sweep by turning the rotary Knob Press the rotary knob to open the RF Freq Sweep Stop Freq menu All sweep parameters are default except for the sweep mode The default settings are not changed A Q Select the Mode parameter by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob and select setting Single from the list by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob now the sweep mode is set to single sweep from start to stop frequency 1407 0812 62 2 9 Start Freq Center Freq Example of Setup Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction Level Sweep Auto 100 000 000 0 MHz 500 000 000 0 MHz 300 000 000 0 MHz I Extern Single Extern Step Extern Star E 2 Example of Setup R amp S SMB o o Single sl Execute Single Sweep Reset Sweep Switch on RF frequency sweep by selecting State On Start Freq 100 000 000 0 MHz cl Now the Execute Single Sweep bution to trigger the single sweep appears The RF is not yet active which means that no RF signal is output Step 3 Activate RF signal D Active RF output by pre
103. ALL IBWRT generator OUTP STAT ON Switch on RF output CALL IBWRI generators AM SOUR INT Get AM modulation source LFGEN CALL IBWRT generator s LFO FREQ 15kHz Set modulation frequency to 15 kHz CALIn IBWRI generators AM SOPCI Set AM modulation depth 30 CALL IBWRT generator AM STAT ON Switch on AM An amplitude modulated signal is now applied at the RF output of the instrument gt To return to manual control press the key at the front panel Switchover to Remote Control On power on the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be operated via the front panel controls or via mouse and external keyboard In case of remote control via the IEC IEEE bus the instrument is set to remote control REMOTE status by means of an addressed command With remote control via Ethernet remote control is not automatically set by means of a command The instrument must be explicitly set to the REMOTE state e g by sending the interface command amp GTR go to remote In the REMOTE state instrument control from the front panel or via mouse and keyboard is disabled Menus can be opened however e g to verify settings Buttons and setting fields are displayed in gray and cannot be activated REMOTE is displayed in the status line 1407 0806 32 9 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Switchover to Remote Control The instrument remains in the REMOTE mode until local control is selected either manually with
104. Awa shift a z Enters the sign Switches between upper case and lower case letters CTRL 0 9 a z CTRL Enters the numberfetter BACKSPACE Clears the last entry number sign or decimal point DIAGRAM CTRL D Sets the cursor on the block diagram and hides all menus ESC ESC Selects the next higher menu selection level When the editing mode is exited with ESC the previous value is restored FILE CTRL S storage under Activates the menu for storing instrument settings Windows FREQ CTRL F Activates the frequency entry G n dBuV ALT F9 Selects the unit Giga Nano dBuV for the RF level and dBu for the LF level LOCAL CTRL Q Switches the instrument from remote control to manual control M u uV ALT F10 Selects the units Mega Micro and uV for RF levels MENU CTRL M Calls the menu selection list 1407 0812 62 3 25 E 2 Legend of Front Panel Controls R amp S SMB MOD ON OFF CTRL O Switches modulation on off MOD OFF is indicated in the status line ON OFF TOGGLE CTRL T Switches a block or parameter on off Toggles between the different possibilities of setting a selection parameter PRESET CTRL P Restores a defined basic instrument setup indicated in the status line MINBAR Front Panel Key Emulation The R amp S SMB provides a front panel key emulation to enable execution of the front panel key functions by mouse e g for remote access The emulation is called by a right mouse click The
105. B RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 18 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description MMEMory RDIRectory lt directory_ name gt The command deletes the specified subdirectory in the specified directory If no directory is specified the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM RDIR carrier deletes the subdirectory carrier in the current directory RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific MMEMory STORe STATe 0 lt file_name gt This command stores the current instrument setting in the specified file If O is specified the current instrument setting is stored directly in the specified file The intermediate instrument settings can be stored using the SAV command lf a number other than 0 is specified the instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number using the common command SAV The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM STOR STAT 0 VAR RS_GEN TEST1 ss Stores the current instrument setting in the file test1 ss inthe USER directory on the internal CompactFlash Card RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 19 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut system contains the commands which set the pro
106. CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var rs Gen ucory Import ucor amp selects that the user correction list ucor_imp is imported into ASCII file UCOr CSV 1407 0806 32 6 29 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe SEParator DECimal DOT COMMa The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Example CORR DEXC MODE EXP selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file CORR DEC AP ILS SEs vary rs cen ucor 1 moore ucor esy selects ASCII file ucor csv as destination for the user correction list data CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT selects the decimal separator dot CORR DEXC SEL var rs_gen ucor import ucor_imp selects that the user correction list ucor_imp is imported into ASCII file UCOr CSV SOURce CORRection DEXChange EXECute The command starts the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported
107. Correction function is used to create and activate lists in which level correction values predefined by the user are freely assigned to RF frequencies Correction is performed by the user defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values The lists are created in the List Editor Each list is stored in its own file with the predefined file extension uco The name of the User Correction file can be freely selected The files are loaded from the Lists file manager Externally created tables with pairs of frequency and level values can be converted into User Correction files using the import function The external files must have the file extension txt or csv These file formats are provided e g by the Microsoft Excel program The separators for table columns and for decimal floating point numerals can be set In addition internally created User Correction data can be exported into ASCII files using the export function If user correction is activated the UCOR display User Correction is shown in the header together with the Level display The RF output level is the sum of both values Level UCOR Output level If activated user correction Is effective in all operating modes User Correction Menu The User Correction menu is opened either in the RF function b
108. CtION SUDSYSTEM cee cccceeeeeecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeseeneeeees 6 25 SOURCE FM SUBSYSTEM egener eet A ege Ee 6 33 SOURCE FREQUENCY SUDSYSIOM EE 6 36 SOURCE INPUT SUDSY SISI EE 6 41 SOURCE EFOUIDUL SUBSYSTEM EE 6 42 SOURCE LIST SUDSV SIS EE 6 49 SOURCe MODUuIation Subsystem ccccccceseeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeees 6 61 SOURCE PHASE SUDSY SIS DEEN 6 62 SOURCE PIM SUDSY SION NEE 6 63 SOURCE POWER SUDSYS LCM BEE 6 66 SOURce PULM and PGEN Subsystem cccssesseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 6 72 SOURCE ROSGillator SUBSYSTEM EE 6 76 TUDE 6 78 STATUS SUDSYSIE mea taunts cticaiwe at eatitnemncceteatematencte 6 84 OO COMPOUNDS VStS EE 6 88 TEST SUDSYSICMN EE 6 98 TRIGGEr le SEM EE 6 99 INTE SUDSY SCI EE 6 104 l 6 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description 6 Remote Control Commands In the following all remote control commands for the R amp S SMB will be presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values An introduction to remote control and the status registers of the R amp S SMB is given in chapter 5 Remote Control Basics Command Description Notation All commands implemented in the instrument are first listed in tables and then described in detail arranged alphabetically according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the individual description of the commands Table of Commands Command In the
109. DEVaion II genug I wmee Il RESCH SOURce FM DEViation 0 Hz 20 MHz The command sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode see data sheet Example EM SES sets the FM modulation deviation to 5 kHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI 10 kHz See data sheet Compliant SOURce FM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling modefor the external modulation input MOD EXT in the case of frequency modulation Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT can be set independently for all modulations Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example FM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external frequency modulation RST value Resolution Options SCPI AC Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 33 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce FM EXTernal DEViation 0 40 MHze The command enters the deviation of the external FM signal The deviation of the internal source must not exceed the deviation of the external source in case of modulation source Int Ext Example FM EXT DEV 3kHz sets an external modulation depth of 3 kHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 kHz Compliant SOURce FM MODE NORMal LNOise HDEViation The command sets the mode for the frequency modulation Param
110. DEXC AFIL EXT TXT Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between decimal point and comma with floating point numerals Remote control command SOUR LIST DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Remote control command SOUR LIST DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB 4 59 E 2 List Mode Select ASCII Source Destination List Mode Destination Source List Mode Import Export List Mode 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Calls the File Manager for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a list mode list Source or the ASCII file the list mode list is exported destination in Remote control command SOUR LIST lt DEXC APTLE SEI T war user list 71st lets Calls the File Manager for selecting the list mode list to be exported Source into an ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported destination in Remote control command SOUR LEST sDEXCeSEL Caer user uCcor7 lict txt Stars the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as list mode list When export is selected the list mode list is exported into the selected ASCII file Remote control command SOUR LIST DEXC EXEC 4 60 E 2 R amp S SMB Modulations Modulations The R amp S SMB Signal Generator provides amplitude modulation AM frequency modulation FM phase modulation PM and pulse modu
111. Description Table 4 1 Preset state important generator settings ER S Uninterrupted level setting LF output 1407 0806 32 4 2 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings General Configuration of Instrument Setup Key The key opens the Setup menu The Setup menu is divided into several sections The System section is used to set general instrument parameters The Test section is used to perform function tests The Environment section is used to configure the controller interfaces The Remote section is used to configure the remote control interfaces The Protection is used to set the protection level for service functions The Settings section contains the Save Recall menu Most submenus of this key can be accessed only via the key or the menu tree key with the following exceptions The Reference Oscillator submenu can also be called up in the RF block and is therefore described in the section on this block see section RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator page 4 30 The Save Recall submenu can also be called up with the key and is therefore described in the section on this key see section Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key page 4 19 System 3 Ref Oscillator Internal Adjustments Hardware Config Start Stop Gui Update Soltware Optio
112. E 100 0008 e ogecb get Etuden INCLu e exclude L souRsezPowermoos J Fxeacwiswee isOURGePOWerSTERLNGRemen omoa fe IsouRezPowersteemoos usero ll SOURce POWer ALC OMODe SHOLd The command sets the level control mode which becomes active when automatic level control is deactivated ALC Off Parameter SHOLd Level control is activated briefly if the level or frequency changes ALC Off Sample amp Hold Example POW ALC OFF deactivates automatic level control POW ALC OMOD SHOL level control is briefly activated if the frequency or level changes SHOLd Device specific RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 66 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce POWer ALC SONCe The command briefly activates level control for correction purposes The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example POW ALC OFF deactivates automatic level control POW ALC SONC level control is performed once only RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce POWer ALC STATe ON OFF AUTO The command activates deactivates automatic level control Parameters ON internal level control is permanently activated OFF internal level control is deactivated Sample amp Hold mode is activated AUTO internal level control is activated deactivated automatically depending on the operating state Example POW ALC ON activate
113. ENTER If the list is longer than the displayed window a scroll bar is available Single Execute Single Swi Step Reset Sweep _Reset Sweep Extern Single Extern Step Ti Extern Statt Stop Opens the selection list Press rotary knob or Press Enter key Click button ENTER key Selects an entry Select entry using the rotary Select entry using the Double click the desired knob or the up down arrow up down arrow keys and entry keys and confirm with the confirm with the Enter key rotary knob or the ENTER key or press key several times until the desired entry is displayed in the selection field Start Freq Shift the displayed list section Shift the displayed list section Press or al Seon in using the rotary knob or the using the up down arrow up down arrow keys keys the scroll bar until the desired entry is displayed 1407 0812 62 3 15 E 2 Setting Parameters R amp S SMB Terminating Entries Setting Parameters Variations by means of the rotary knob are immediately set e g RF frequency variation All other parameter settings have to be confirmed by a pressing the rotary knob or one of the unit keys see also section Selecting a Unit page 3 14 Some settings require additional confirmation with the Accept button This is the case when it is useful to first enter a few values and to confirm them together e g when network settings are made Settings not yet confirmed by Accept are displayed in
114. EQ SPAN Le changing these values causes the STARt value to change and vice versa STARt CENTer SPAN 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if OFFSet Is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 KHz OFFSet RFma OF FSet Example FREQ STARt 1 MHz sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz FREQ STOP 2 GHz sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz RST value Resolution Options Correlation SCPI 100 MHz 0 01 Hz STARt CENTer SPAN 2 Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 39 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce FREQuency STEP INCRement 0 Hz RFmax 100 kHz The command sets the step width for the frequency setting if the frequency values UP DOWN are used and variation mode SOUR FREQ STEP MODE USER is selected The command is linked to Variation Step for manual control i e the command also sets the step width of the rotary knob for Variation Active on Example FREQ STEP 50 kHz sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50 KHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 MHz 0 01 Hz Device specific SOURce FREQuency STEP MODE USER DECimal This command activates USER or deactivates DECimal1 the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with
115. ET ON activates the above settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork DNS SET The command activates the DNS setting Commands SYST COMM NETW DNS The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NEIN DNS SEI activates all changes of the DNS settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork GET The command retrieves the current network settings They can be queried with the corresponding commands The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW GET retrieves the current network settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff The command enters the IP address The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Example SYST COMM NETW TPAD 748 9210 enters the IP address of the R amp S SMB SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 91 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress GATeway 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff The command enters the IP address of the default gateway The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Example SYST COMM N
116. ETW GAT 1 2 3 4 enters the IP address of the default gateway SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP address settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI 28 Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress MODE STATic AUTO The command selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET Parameters AUTO The IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function STATic The IP address is assigned manually P2P A Peer to Peer connection is used Example SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE AUTO the IP address is assigned automatically DHCP SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET ON activates DHCP RST value Resolution Options SCPI AUTO ie Device specific SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SET The command activates the IP settings Commands SYST COMM NETW IPAD The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET activates all changes of the IP adress settings RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 92 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SYSTem COMMunicate NETWork IPADdress SUBNet MASK 0 0 0 0 ff ff ff ff The command enters the Subnet mask The entry is only activated after sending command SYST COMM NETW
117. Eep FREQuency SPACing LIN LOG The command is always effective for the currently set sweep spacing Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing SWE POIN 401 sets 401 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 1 MHz RST value Options Correlation SCPI The value of SWE STEP is adjusted Device specific adapted to automatically instrument properties SOURce SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIiNear LOGarithmic The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Example SWE SPAC LIN selects linear sweep spacing for a frequency sweep Options SCPI SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LiNear 0 STOP STAR The command sets the step width for linear sweeps This command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 If STEP LIN changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained The keywords FREQuency and LINear can be omitted see example The command is then SCPl compliant Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing SWE STEP 2 MHz sets the step width for linear RF sweep spac
118. External only Selects the coupling mode AC or DC for external feed Note Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external source Remote control command SOUR AM EXT COUP AC In case of selection Source Int the settings for the internal modulation sources are offered in the AM Source INTernal section of the Amplitude Modulation menu These settings affect all analog modulations which use the same modulation sources fin AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 16 000 0 kHz LFGen Shape Sine LF Gen Freq AM LF Gen Shape AM 1407 0806 32 Source Internal Sets the frequency of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Source Internal Selects the shape of the LF generator signal Remote control command SOUR LFO SHAP SIN 4 64 E 2 R amp S SMB Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM An internal and or external source can be selected for frequency modulation A LF modulation generator is available as internal sources Two tone FM is possible by simultaneously switching on the external and internal source The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Selection between three modulation modes is possible Normal mode with full setting range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation Low Noise mode with
119. F and 1 for ON Example OUTPut STATe Answer for ON 1 5 Text character data is returned in a short form Example SOURce AM SOURce Answer for EXTernal EXT 1407 0806 32 5 14 E 2 R amp S SMB Parameters SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numerical values Units Special numeric values MIN MAX DEF UP DOWN INF NINF NAN Boolean Parameters 1407 0806 32 Numerical values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the values must be in the value range 9 9E37 to 9 9E37 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SOURce FREQuency 1 5 kHz SOURce FREQuency 1 5E3 Some settings allow relative values to be stat
120. Ge SWEep POWerSTEP LOGarihmiel ora RESCHT 1407 0806 32 6 78 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce SWEep FREQuency DWELI 3 ms 10 s The command sets the time taken for each frequency step of the sweep Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Example SWE DWEL 12 ms sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a frequency sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI 10 ms 0 1 ms Device specific SOURce SWEep FREQuency EXECute The command triggers a sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE SINGle The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SWE FREQ MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the frequency sweep SWE FREQ EXEC triggers a single frequency sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the sweep mode The keyword FREQuency can be omitted see example The command is then SCPI compliant Parameters AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each frequency step of the sweep is triggered indivi
121. L VALID Output of valid signal This signal marks the valid signal times valid level and frequency indication The signal is generated automatically 10 Instrument triggering PULSE VIDEO Output of internal pulse generator signal or external pulse signal fed in signal 12 Input of external pulse signal of external trigger gate signal for internal pulse generator 13 Reference signal output REF OUT gt REF OUT Output of internal 10 MHz reference signal 14 Reference signal input REF IN Input for external 10 MHz reference signal OCXO This option option R amp S SMB B1 generates a very precise 10 MHz reference signal It needs some nominal frequency 1407 0812 62 via the PULSE EXT connector video PULSE EXT Input of external pulse signal or input minutes of warm up time to reach its Legend for Rear Panel View See data sheet and chapter 4 section Sweep Mode See chapter 4 section Pulse Modulation See chapter 4 section Pulse Modulation See data sheet and chapter 4 section RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator See data sheet and chapter 4 section RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator See data sheet Putting into Operation R amp S SMB Putting into Operation The following section describes the procedure for putting the instrument into operation It contains general safety instructions for instrument operation The installat
122. MM OFFS 0 The attenuator mode is set in the Attenuator Settings section Attenuator Mode RF Level Sets the attenuator mode at the RF output Auto Standard mode The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range Remote control command OUTP AMOD AUTO Fixed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed in its current position and the resulting variation range is defined The range is displayed under Attenuator Fixed Range If automatic level control is activated ALC State On the level settings are made without interruption If the normal variation range is overranged or underranged level errors increase considerably and the warning Level under overrange appears in the info line The spectral purity of the output signal decreases with high attenuation Remote control command OUTP AMOD FIX 1407 0806 32 4 34 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Level pale nixeqmange In Displays the level range in which the level is set without interruption for the Attenuator Mode fixed setting Remote control commands OUTP AFIX RANG UPP OUTP AFIX RANG LOW If the level is set using the rotary knob the step width is defined in the User Variation section vanationm SIERA RE Revel cuisine user defined step width for entering the RF level using the rotary knob Level variation with this step width must also be activat
123. Mod Modulation Amplitude Mod Frequency Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources For a fully equipped instrument two LF generators and a noise generator are available as internal sources PhiM Source Jint Ext PhiM Mode High Deviation PhiM Deviation 1 00000 rad PhiM Sensitivity 1 000000 rad per Volt PhiM Ext Coupling Ac PhiM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 16 0000 kHz LFGen Shape Sine State Phim Activates deactivates PhiM modulation Activation of PhiM deactivates frequency modulation Remote control command SOUR PM STAT ON PhiM Source Selects the source for the PhiM signal The source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only Int Selects the internal source for PhiM modulation Remote control command SOUR PM SOUR INT 1407 0806 32 4
124. NTER Calls the next menu level Activates the editing mode for highlighted numeric and alphanumeric parameters Terminates a data entry the new value is set In case of numeric parameters the unit indicated next to the value in the menu applies Switches highlighted status parameters on and off on off state Confirms OK and closes message windows Keys for data entry The unit keys can either select a unit and thus determine the absolute value or change the unit Their function depends on the time at which they are pressed during parameter entry Selecting the unit If a unit key is pressed immediately after a numeric value has been entered it terminates the entry and determines the multiplication factor for the respective basic unit e g the k m key determines the unit KHz after frequency entry If a level value is entered the unit indicated on the unit key is used e g the k m mV key determines the unit mV for level entry The level entry must be active in this case e g by pressing the key 1 4 R amp S SMB See chapter 3 section Setting Parameters See chapter 3 section Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters E 2 R amp S SMB 4 Keypad for data entry ON OFF TOGGLE BACK SPACE 1407 0812 62 Legend for Front Panel View Changing the unit See chapter 3 section lf a numeric entry is terminated with ENTER e g by clicking the rotary knob and not with a unit ke
125. OUR SWE POW STEP With remote control the level increases by the value specified under SWEep POW STEP which each sent POW MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each external trigger triggers one sweep step only Mode Extern Step The level increases by the value entered under SWEep POWer STEP Example SWE POW MODE AUTO selects Mode Auto for a level sweep Options SCPI Device specific SOURce SWEep POWer POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in a level sweep The command is linked to the command SWEep POWer STEP as follows POINts STOP STARE STEP LOG 1 If POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained Example POW STAR 30 dBm sets the start frequency to 30 dBm POW STOP 10 dBm sets the stop frequency to 10 dBm SWE POW POIN 20 sets 20 sweep steps The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 1 dB RST value Options Correlation SCPI 20 dB The value of SWE POW STEP Is Device specific adjusted automatically adapted to instrument properties SOURce SWEep POWer SPACing MODE The command queries the sweep spacing The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always linear This command is a query command and has no RST value Example SWE POW SPAC MODE queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep Result LIN linear spacing Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 82 E 2 R amp S SMB
126. OURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe EXTernal BUS EAUTo The command sets the trigger source for the RF level sweep The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control SINGle BUS Single mode EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command SWEep POW MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGle One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SWE POW EXEC Or TRG Or TRIG PSW IMM The mode has to be set to AUTO SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current level a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start level and so on Example TRIG PSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector RST val
127. PAN defines the sweep range This command is linked to the commands SOURce FREQuency STARt and SOURce FREQuency STOP Le changing these values causes the CENTer value to change and vice versa CENTer STARt STOP 2 As with the Frequency value entered in the header the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if OFFSet Is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 KHz OFFSet RFmax OFFSet Example FREQ CENT 400 MHz sets the center frequency for the frequency sweep to 400 MHz FREQ SPAN 200 MHz sets a span of 200 MHz This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz to 500 MHz RST Correlation SCPI 300 MHz CENTer STARt STOP 2 Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 36 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce FREQuency CW FlXed 300 kHz RFmax The command sets the frequency of the RF output signal for CW mode SOURce FREQuency MODE CW In Sweep mode SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep this value is linked to the current sweep frequency In addition to a numerical value it is also possible to specify UP and Down The frequency is then increased or decreased by the value which is set under SOURce FREQuency STEP As with the FREQ value entered in the display the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only ef
128. REQ MODE CW Selects the Sweep instrument operating mode and Sweep mode Auto Single Step Sets an automatic repeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle continues from the current sweep setting The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR AUTO SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start frequency The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIGO SWE SOUR SING SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ EXEC Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by a variation of the value in the Current Freq entry window If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Freq If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the current LF frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR LFO SWE FREQ MODE MAN SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 183 SOUR LFO FREQ MAN 12 kHz 4 E 2
129. SMB Display Status Information and Messages Display The status information and messages are displayed in the header section of the screen The messages differ with respect to their importance errors warnings info and the time of their appearance brief and permanent messages They require different treatment by the user Further information on all messages can be called in the info window see section nfo Window Display page 3 6 Chapter 9 Error Messages includes an overview of all status information and messages as well as instructions for error elimination Status Information The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the R amp S SMB The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user Status information is displayed between the frequency and level fields at the left of the info line or in the info line itself Freq RFOFF_ Level 1 000 000 000 0 erz JI 30 00 or J ALC S H np Messages Messages indicate errors in the instrument They are displayed in the info line in different colors depending on their importance and display duration Errors e g no calibration data are displayed in red information e g file not found and warnings in black Warnings indicate less significant errors e g the instrument operates outside specified data Volatile messages Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument e g
130. SOUR INT 1407 0806 32 4 30 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator External Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator Adjustment Active Reference Oscillator Adjustment DAC value Reference Oscillator 1407 0806 32 External An external reference signal is used The frequency of the external reference signal must be selected under External Reference Frequency Remote control command SOUR ROSC SOUR EXT Selects the frequency of the external reference signal Remote control command SOUR ROSC EXT FREQO 13E6 Selects adjustment mode Off On The calibrated adjustment value of the internal reference frequency is used This value is determined at one of the R amp S service shops during calibration Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT OFF A user defined adjustment value is used The value is entered under Adjustment Frequency This allows the frequency to be impaired freely for example to simulate a frequency error The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the calibration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to Off Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ STAT ON Enters a user defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency This value is not used unless Adjustment Active On is selected Remote control command SOUR ROSC INT ADJ VAL 1400 4 31 E 2
131. SOURce FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command is different depending on which parameter is used 1407 0806 32 6 1 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB Example Selection of the parameters for the command sOURGe COUPLing E DC If parameter AC is selected only the AC content is fed through in the case of DC the DC as well as the AC content Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header cf Chapter 5 Optional Keywords The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and will be briefly explained in the following see also Chapter 5 Section Parameters lt Boolean gt This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be i
132. SSYN 0 H123456 76 TESI DIR S5yYN 0 Response H12345678 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 98 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description TRIGger Subsystem The TRiGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the RF and LF sweep The trigger input connector is configured in the SOURce INPut subsystem The trigger system of the R amp S Signal Generator is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger system The TRIGger system differs from the SCPI system as follows No INITiate command the instrument behaves as if INITiate CONTinuous ON were set Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist Other commands associated with the trigger system of the R amp S Signal Generator can be found in the modulation and RF signal subsystems Command Parameters TRIGger0 SWEep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle BUS EXTernal EAUTo No query GH GE E EE BCEE EE EECHER BCEE EE EECHER BCEE CES TRIGger SWEep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle BUS EXTernal TRIGger LFFSweep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGle BUS EXTernal EAUTo No query TRIGger0 SWEep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe EXTernal BUS EAUTo TRIGger LFFSWeep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe BUS EXTernal Both commands set the trigger source for the LF sweep alias commands The trigger is triggered by the command SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency EXECute The names of the parameters correspond di
133. SYST ERR CODE ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 94 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SYSTem ERRor CODE NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Only the error number is returned and not the entire error text Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see section Error Messages H the error queue is empty O is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST YERR CODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor COUNt The command queries the number of entries in the error queue If the error queue is empty 0 is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST TERR YCODE queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 1 one error has occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor NEXT The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it Positive error numbers denote device specific errors
134. Signal ccccsssseceeeesseeeeees 2 4 Generation of an RF Frequency Sweep Gonal 2 8 1407 0812 62 I 2 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Getting Started 2 Getting Started Introduction Getting Started The main field of application of the R amp S SMB is the generation of sine wave signals with very high spectral purity These signals are needed e g for adjacent channel or phase noise measurements In addition the RF signal can be modulated with the internal modulations waveforms sine waves and rectangular signals The architecture of the R amp S SMB and the signal flow are shown in a block diagram on the R amp S SMB user interface In the diagram signal processing is performed from left to right left modulation generator right RF output The block diagram in the figure below shows the R amp S SMB Freq Level 363 000 000 00 ure 11 00 sen LiSweep ALC S amp H Info Fig 2 1 Block diagram of R amp S SMB The signal path is configured by installing a frequency option that comprises all required modules One of the following options can be installed R amp S SMB B101 9kHz to 1 1 GHz R amp S SMB B102 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz R amp S SMB B103 9 kHz to 3 2 GHz R amp S SMB B106 9 kHz to 6 GHz Note One of these options must be installed For more detailed information on options refer to the R amp S SMB data sheet available on the R amp S SMB Homepage on the Internet http www rohde schwarz com product sm
135. TER key Select the row above which the new row is to be inserted Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Insert Row s button click the rotary knob or press the ENTERI key Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Save as button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Save button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Mark the User Correction Data button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Mark Create New List click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Use the up down cursor keys to mark the row Mark the GoTo button and press the Enter key Use the numeric keys to enter the row index and terminate the entry by pressing the Enter key Select the row above which the new row is to be inserted Mark the Insert Row s button and press the Enter key Mark the Save as button and press the Enter key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Mark the Save button and press the Enter key Mark the User Correction Data bution and press the ENTER key Mark Create New List and press the Enter key Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory 3 19 Click cell Click c
136. TIM Response WE D s ENKE Response 147 A table below lists the installed assemblies It is divided into the sections Common Assembly and RF Assembly and Baseband Assembly Assembly Assembly name Part Number Part Number of assembly Opens a dialog with additional information on serial number revision and slot of assembly and used bus by assembly serial bus or PCI bus Remote control command see chapter Remote control Commands for parameter name for modules DIAG BGIN RFBO Response 1406 7007 00 02 00 123456 MOD FPGA 20 20 00 Gui Update Setup System In the Start Stop Gui Update menu the update of the displayed parameters can be switched off in order to increase speed for certain settings Note It is especially recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance with short dwell times and for fast settling times The indicated values are not updated and may therefore differ from the internally used values 1407 0806 32 4 5 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB H Gui Update is OFF the values of displayed parameters could difier from their internal used values This mode is mainly provided to support unjittered signal output Le in fast sweep or list mode li remote state is active the lt Local gt key or lt Goto Local gt command changes the value of Gui Update is to ON Remote control command SYST DISP UPD OFF Software Options Setup System T
137. TRIG EXT SLOP POS Negative The pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external trigger signal Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG External Gate only Selects the polarity of the Gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Positive The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT GATE POL NORM Negative The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is low Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT GATE POL INV External trigger or gate only Selects the input impedance for the external trigger and gate signal input PULSE EXT Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT IMP G50 4 75 E 2 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block R amp S SMB LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block An LF generator providing sinusoidal square signals in the frequency range 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz is available for the basic unit without additional equipment options The internal LF generator is the internal source for the analog modulations AM and FM PhiM and as the signal source for the LF output at the front of the instrument The LF generator settings can be made both in the modulation menus and in the LF Output menu The settings are effective for all modulations using the internal modulation source For example a change to the frequency of the LF generator automatically has an effect on AM modulat
138. Test Equipment 1 800 517 8431 Manual iit ZS CCE tt y EE Dn ica CEE Bu The Phy tne an ae Signal Generator R amp S SMB100A 1406 6000 02 Printed in Germany amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test and Measurement Division 1407 0806 32 02 1 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 Fax 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com S Dear Customer throughout this manual the Signal Generator R amp S SMB100A is abbreviated as R amp S SMB The Signal Generator includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners 1407 0806 32 02 2 R amp S SMB Tabbed Divider Overview Tabbed Divider Overview CD ROM including complete operating manual and compiled online help provided in the file inside pocket Data Sheet Safety Instructions Certificate of Quality EU Certificate of Conformity Support Center Address List of R amp S Representatives User documentation for Signal Generator R amp S SMB Operating Manual Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 2 Chapter 2 Getting Started 3 Chapter 3 Manual Operation 4 Chapter 4 Instrument Functions 5 Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 6 Chapter 6 Remote Control Description of Commands H Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Maintenance and Interfaces 9 Chapter 9 Error Messag
139. UCOR3 are available RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency 300 kHz RE max 300 kKHZ RF max The command transfers the frequency data to the table selected with CORR CSET SEL RST does not affect data lists Example CORRICSET vyar Tists ucor ucor selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz 102MHz 103MHz enters the frequency value in the table UCOR1 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQuency POINts The command queries the number of frequency values in the selected table The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CORR CSET var lists ucor ucor selects the table ucorl CORR CSET DATA FREQ POIN queries the number of frequency values in the table ucorl Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 frequency values RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 26 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer 40dB 6dB 40dB 6dB The command transfers the level data to the table selected with cCORRection CSET SELect RST does not affect data lists Example CORRSCSET var lisrs icor uconl selects the table ucor1 CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB 0 75dB enters the level values in the table ucor1 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device speci
140. US E 9 9 128 Numeric data not allowed 9 7 AST AAVA SUI E 9 7 2134 SUTIX TOO TONG EE 9 9 138 Suffix NOt ANOWE 0 cccccccecsssececseeecssseesseesssaaeees 9 9 140 This modulation forces other modulations off 9 13 144 Character data too Jong 9 4 148 Character data not allowed cccccsseceeneeeeeneeees 9 4 158 String data not allowed 9 9 161 INValid DIOCK data 9 6 168 Block data not allouwed 9 4 180 Adjustment Tale 9 11 182 Adjustment data MISSIN sense eeeees 9 11 183 Adjustment data mvald 9 11 1407 0806 32 10 1 Index 2 200 Cannot access hardware cccccssecesseeeesneeeeeaes 9 11 201 Hardware revision out Of date 9 13 202 Cannot access the EEDROM 9 11 203 Command protected aa nannonnneannnnnnannnnnnnannnnnnna 9 4 203 Invalid EEPROM data 9 13 204 Driver initialization failed 00aa00aa0aaaaannaanaaann 9 12 221 Settings conflict icc cccececcsseccseeseccnsecceenseecseneesanses 9 9 222 Data Out Of ronde 9 5 Ee tee EE 9 10 224 Illegal parameter value nenne anenee 9 6 225 0O f OF MEMON EE 9 7 226 Lists NOt SAME Jengoth 9 7 240 Hardware emmor 2 scccccecsccnseccnsecnsnsessenecsussanssesenens 9 5 241 Hardware gmussimg 9 6 2247 INO curent NSE EE 9 13 242 Unknown list type specified ccccccceseseeseeeeees 9 13 3 300 Device specific emt 9 5 SEET ee EE 9 9 330 Self test toile
141. YST DATE 2003 05 01 sets May 1 2003 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ON OFF The command switches the update of the display on off A switchover from remote control to manual control always sets the status of the update of the display to ON Example SYST DISP UPD OFF switches update of displayed parameter values off RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem ERRor ALL The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see section Error Messages If the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR ALL queries all entries in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem ERRor CODE ALL The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them Only the error numbers are returned and not the entire error text Positive error numbers denote device specific errors and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see section Error Messages H the error queue is empty O No error is returned The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example
142. a is overwritten RST value Resolution Options SCPI SOURce LIST POWer POINts The command queries the length in points of the LEVel part of the selected list The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example LIST SEL var lists listmode list3 selects list3 for editing List3 is created if it does not yet exist LIST POW POIN queries the number of levels in Ier Response 327 LIST2 has 327 level entries RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SOURce LIST RESet The command resets the list to the starting point The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example LIST RES resets the list to the starting point RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 58 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST SELect lt list name gt The command selects the specified list If a new list is to be created the name can be entered here The list is created if it does not yet exist The list selected here is available for the further processing steps editing and is used in the instrument when the List mode Is activated The files are stored with the fixed file extensions Isw in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST SEL in which case the list mode file in the specified directory is selec
143. access in contrast to remote control does not use remote control commands but the regular user interface displayed using separate software which is installed on the external PC The instrument can thus be manually operated from the PC as on the unit itself Preconditions for remote access are a connection between signal generator and PC via a LAN network and the installation of the VNC client software on the PC and on the R amp S SMB The VNC client software for setting up the connection is included in the Linux Unix operating system per default For Windows operating system the free of charge software Ultr VNC is provided on the R amp S SMB CD ROM VNC client programms for other operating systems are available free of charge on the internet After the connection is established the signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed on the external PC and the R amp S SMB can be manually remote accessed from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard or a front panel key emulation that can be operated with the mouse see chapter 3 section Legend of Front Panel Controls Installation of the software Ultrt VNC and establishing the connection between external PC and signal generator for Windows operating system is described in the following Remote access via an external controller with Linux Unix operating
144. agement page 3 21 or by changing an existing list which will then be saved under a new name 1407 0812 62 3 18 E 2 R amp S SMB Mark the Edit User Cor Call up editor Enter value The cursor marks the first row User Cor Data button in of the Frequency Hz column Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the Edit the individual menu click the rotary knob or press the ENTERI key Use the numeric keys to enter the value and terminate the entry by pressing the unit key Data button in the individual menu and press the Enter key Use the numeric keys to enter the value and terminate the entry by pressing the Enter key Editors Click the Edit User Cor Data button in the individual menu Change column Press the left right cursor Press the left right cursor Click cell keys keys Change row Select row The cursor moves to the selected row Insert row A row Is inserted above the currently marked row If no row has been selected a row is inserted at the beginning of the list Save list under a new name Save list under the same name Create new list 1407 0812 62 Use the rotary knob or the up down cursor keys to mark the row Use the rotary knob or the cursor keys to mark the GoTo button click the rotary knob or press the ENTER key Enter the row index in the entry field by means of the numeric keys click the rotary knob or press the EN
145. al Coupling cccccccsseccssssecceseesaneees 4 71 6 63 PIII ee 4 71 6 43 et Ee EE 4 70 6 64 PRIM Sensitivity EE 4 71 6 64 PHM SHAD C5 2ioeoaisdaseiceise aan ee e 4 71 PRIM SOUCO EEN 4 69 6 65 PHM EE 4 69 6 65 Point to point connection cccceccecceecsecseeceecneeeeenesaness 1 20 Polarity Pulse Modulation c cscccseecneecneeeeees 4 73 6 73 Power List MOG6 EE 4 58 6 58 Power On ele 4 5 6 9 Power On State 4 36 6 22 PPE Parallel poll enable register cccccseeeceseeeeeees 5 24 Preferred DNS Server Address Setup 4 14 6 91 PICS Le ee Ee 1 17 Preset instrument settings cccccccsseeseeeaee 4 2 6 4 6 96 Program mnemonic too long 772 9 8 Protection overvoltage uk KENE 4 35 6 21 Protection service FUNCTIONS ccccceccee cece ce eee een ees 4 16 6 96 Pulse Delay EE 4 74 6 72 Pulse External Impedance naanonnennaannannnnanane 4 73 6 41 Pulse generator siate 4 82 Pulse modulation 0 cccccccccceccececseceeseceeseceneeneaeeneaes 4 72 6 72 Pulse modulation repetition frequency 4 74 6 43 6 73 PUSE peod EE 4 74 6 73 Pulse trigger input Slope 1ccccecseceseecseeceeeeeees 4 75 6 74 PUSE e LEE 4 74 6 75 Q Ee 5 9 FOSPONSCS ch ege eege ee 5 14 Query deadlocked 430 cccccccccssssscccececseeseeecececeeseseeeees 9 8 Query interrupted 470 9 8 Query unterMinated CA201 9 8 QUESTION SE 5 17 Queue overflow 2801 9 8 QUOTA ON INTIS o bats ook co A 5 17 R
146. al is available at the REF OUT connector rear of instrument The frequency of the internal reference signal is fixed to 10 MHz External impairment is possible in both Adjustment State states On or Off For EFC Electronic Frequency Control e g in phase noise measurement systems external FM modulation DC coupling in low noise mode is used FM DC mode yields a fixed tuning sensitivity which is independent from the set RF output frequency The tuning sensitivity is equal to the set FM deviation In the external reference mode an external signal with selectable frequency and defined level must be input at the REF IN connector This signal is output at the REF OUT connector The EXT REF status message appears in the display header Reference Oscillator Menu The Reference Oscillator menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF ms eS Frequency Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The menu is used to select the source to enter the frequency of an external reference signal and to adjust the reference frequency This mode corresponds to EFC mode Electronic Frequency Control External e External Reference Frequency 10 MHz Adjustment Adjustment Active I Adjustment DAC Value i 000 Source Reference Oscillator Selects the source of the reference frequency Internal The internal reference signal of 10 MHz is used Remote control command SOUR ROSC
147. all previous commands have been processed This bit can be used to trigger a service request OPC OPERATION COMPLETE QUERY returns a 1 when all previous commands have been processed It is important to ensure that the timeout set at the IEC IEEE bus is long enough OPT OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the options configured in the instrument and returns a list of the installed options The options are separated by commas PRE 0 255 PARALLEL POLL REGISTER ENABLE sets the parallel poll enable register to the specified value The PRE query command returns the content of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form PSC 0 1 POWER ON STATUS CLEAR determines whether the content of the ENABle registers are retained or reset at power on Parameters 0 The content of the status registers is retained at power on If the status registers ESE and SRE are configured accordingly this may cause a service request to be triggered at power on The content of the status registers is reset at power on The query PSC retrieves the contents of the Power on Status Clear flag The answer is either 0 or 1 RCL 0 10 RECALL calls up the instrument status which was stored under the specified number using the SAV command 0 corresponds to the power on state This command can also be used to call up the 3 intermediate instrument states which are stored with SAV RST RESET resets the instrument to a defined default sta
148. ame of the computer or a computersome domain Ed Choose the type of TCP IP resource you d like to create Raw Socket Port Humber f Ce V1 11 Instrument LAN Device Name Try connecting to this resource lt Back Next gt Finish Cancel _ lt Bock Newt gt ve Cancel gt Press the Test button A message indicates whether the link to the Signal Generator can be set up or not If a connection cannot be set up check whether the controller and the instrument are connected to the network network cable and switched on Correct spelling of the IP address or the computer name can also be checked For further error location inform the network administrator In large networks specification of additional addresses may be required for link setup e g gateway and subnet mask which are known to the network administrator 1407 0806 32 Se E 2 Switchover to Remote Control R amp S SMB HAX P AN Successfully opened a VISA session to TCRIP 127 0001 INSTR HAX f P AN Could not open a VISA session to TCPIP 27 0 0 1 INSTR gt Press the Next button An alias name for the instrument can be entered in the next window This name must not be mistaken for the computer name It is only used for instrument identification within the program and displayed in the menu as an option in case of an Ethernet link Measurement amp Automation Explorer You Gar specily an alias for this gario Anaiari a
149. an applied trigger at the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG EXT SLOP NEG the pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external trigger signal RST value Resolution Options SCPI POSitive Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S M n IL Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 74 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal GATe POLarity NORMal INVerted Selects the polarity of the Gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG EXT GAT POL NORM The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high RST value Resolution Options SCPI NORMal z Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific _ SOURce PULM TRIGger MODE AUTO EXTernal EGATe The command selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation Parameters AUTO The pulse modulation is generated continuously EXTernal The pulse modulation is triggered by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector EGATe The pulse modulation is gated by an external gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Example PULM TRIG MODE EXT selects triggering by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector RST value Resolution Options SCPI AUTO Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Compliant SOURce PULM WIDTh 20ns 1s The command sets the width of th
150. an be simultaneously used refer to the R amp S SMB data sheet The status display in the block shows the active modulation s RF block RF config IT on In this block the RF parameters and frequency level sweep settings are set The active sweep is displayed in the block The key switches the RF signal on and off When the signal is switched off the switch before the RF output symbol is open RF settings include Frequency and reference frequency Level settings if required Frequency and level sweep Note Numeric values for frequency and level are entered best and quickest with the aid of the and LEVEL keys Info and Help System The R amp S SMB comprises a comprehensive info and help system Context sensitive help can be called any time with the key The help system indicates the currently selected parameter and offers additional services such as cross references index and contents The content of the help system corresponds to the operating manual of the R amp S SMB Warning and conflict messages caused by incorrect operation as well as further information are displayed in the Info line A complete list of existing conflicts is displayed when the key is pressed Additional information on entries can be requested from the help system The history function permits display of all messages Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in Chapter 3 Manual Operation Menus and inst
151. and Remote Control Interfaces sek EN ENEE ENN 8 1 Introduction Maintenance and Intertaces 0 ceeeceececeeceeeececeececeeeeseeeeseeaeeess 8 1 HENSE ee een 8 1 Cleaning the Outside and Storing ccccccccceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaas 8 1 Hardware INtEGM ACCS sc oes erences Sane ache ee esa a ieee as 8 2 IEC IEEE Bus Interface EEN 8 2 LAN CONNMOCION be Mee EE 8 5 USB Connection USB and USB IN eccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeees 8 8 1407 0806 32 l 8 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Introduction Maintenance and Interfaces The following chapter contains information on the maintenance of the signal generator and a description of the remote control interfaces Please follow the instructions in the service manual when exchanging modules or ordering spares The order no for spare parts can be found in the service manual The address of our support center and a list of all Ronde amp Schwarz service centers can be found at the beginning of the printed manual The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting repair and exchange of modules Maintenance The instrument does not need a periodic maintenance What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument However it is recommended to check the rated data from time to time Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially
152. and negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI see Chapter 9 If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned The command is identical to the command STATus QUEue NEXT The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST ERR queries the oldest entry in the error queue Response 0 no error no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 95 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SYSTem KLOCk ON OFF The command Keyboard LOCk disables the front panel keyboard of the R amp S Signal Generator including the key or enables it again OFF Example SYST KLOC ON activates the keyboard lock The keyboard cannot be operated again until it has been enabled with SYST KLOC OFF RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF 8 Compliant SYSTem PRESet The command triggers an instrument reset It has the same effect as the key on the front panel and the RST command The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST PRES all instrument settings also those that are not currently active are reset to their default values RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem PROTect lt ns STATe ON OFF password The command activates and deactivates the specified protection level There are several protection levels whic
153. ands to set the external keyboard vemmens TT Ek KBOard LANGuage US DE This command selects the keyboard language The assignment of some keys depends on the selected language Example KBO LANG US selects keyboard language American English RST value Resolution Options SCPI oe ae KBOard LAYout US DE This command selects the keyboard layout for the selected keyboard language The assignment of some keys depends on the selected layout and language Example KBO LAY US activates American keyboard layout RST value Resolution Options SCPI US i Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 13 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB MMEMory Subsystem The MMEMory subsystem Mass Memory contains the commands for managing files and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files The files are stored on the CompactFlash Card of the instrument The var directory can be used to save user defined data any subdirectory structure can be created on var Some default subdirectories are predefined but can be changed at any time The default directory is determined using the command MMEMory CDIR Note The opt directory is a protected and therefore unaccessable system director The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed Therefore this directory should not be accessed since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss To enable files in differ
154. anel the CLOSE key can be used The remaining menu area is variable and comprises various fields for setting parameters Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name The kind of setting varies depending on the parameter to be set Fm Deviation 1 00000 kHz Entry field Sent A numeric value e g frequency offset or an alpha numeric value e g file name can be ucorhigh entered in this field 1407 0812 62 3 8 E 2 R amp S SMB FM Mode FM Deviation 1 000 Int Ext LFGen Freq 1 000 0 kHz e FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1000 00 Hz Poubie Pulse State W On FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 0000 kHz LFGen Shape Sine Execute Single Sweep Edit User Cor Data 1407 0812 62 Display Selection field The button indicates that a selection can be made from a list The fold down selection list is displayed below the selection field Depending on the number of entries the full list or only part of it is shown One entry at a time can be selected from the list If an item is not available for selection it is printed in grey and cannot be accessed Units The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the value When the parameter is edited the unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front panel keys When the entry is completed the unit can be changed In this case the value remains unchanged but is automatically adapted to the
155. annot access the EEPROM 202 EE 9 11 Gannotaccess E ge UE ER LE 9 11 Cannot Open tile EE 9 12 GalnOt read Tiles 462 EE 9 12 E eine write tile 4G 1 EE 9 12 Driver initialization faled 204 EE 9 12 File contains Invaliel ala AGS EE 9 12 Filename un Tee HE EE 9 12 Hardware revision Out Of date GO1 9 13 Invalid BE PROM ata 208 E 9 13 Invalid filename extension 464 ccccccssceecceececcseseeecseseeceeseeecseeeessuseeesaseesssaseesssageeeess 9 13 ING CUO gl RE 9 13 This modulation forces other modulations Off A0 9 13 Unknown list type Sp cified 242 EE 9 13 1407 0806 32 I 9 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Status Information and Messages 9 Error Messages Introduction Status Information and Messages This chapter describes the error messages of the signal generator The error messages are output in the Info line on the screen and entered in the error error event queue of the status reporting system A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen Some error messages require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The info window with a list of current messages and a detailed description of each message can be opened with the key In the remote control mode error messages are entered in the error event queue of the status reporting system and can be queried with
156. arth contact Power Power switch connector gt Press the main power switch at the rear of the instrument to position I gt After power up the instrument is either ready for operation STANDBY or in operating mode depending on the state of the ON STANDBY switch on the instrument front see below Note The power switch may remain on for any period of time Switching off is required only if the instrument should be completely isolated from the AC supply ON STANDBY gt Press the ON STANDBY switch on the front panel the green LED a must be on 1 gt After booting the software the instrument is ready for operation All modules in the instrument are supplied with power Start Display and Booting the R amp S SMB After instrument switch on the Linux operating system boots first and then the instrument firmware During booting of the instrument firmware a selftest is performed After booting is completed the block diagram of the signal generator is displayed and the instrument is ready to be operated The settings that were active before the last switch off are established unless another start setting has explicitly been selected in the File menu Note If the software stops unexpectedly the instrument can be shut down by pressing the STANDBY key for approx 5 s 1407 0812 62 1 15 E 2 Putting into Operation R amp S SMB Switching Off ON STANDBY gt Press the ON STANDBY switch on the front panel a co The
157. ary Bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE By analogy with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll cf Section Parallel Poll or using the command IST The parallel poll enable register PPE determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results The PPE can be set using commands PRE and read using command PRE 1407 0806 32 5 24 E 2 R amp S SMB Status Reporting System Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE is the associated ENABle part It can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query or if it d
158. b100a 1407 0812 62 2 1 E 2 Description of Individual Diagram Blocks R amp S SMB Description of Individual Diagram Blocks Available Blocks Block Function of block Status display in the block Effect of TOGGLE ON OFF key The internal modulation Status of modulation Switches the selected internal LF signals are configured and generator generator on or off activated LF sweep is configured and Active sweep activated The modulations are Active modulations Switches the active modulation on or configured and activated off The modulations are activated in the respective menus RF signal is configured and State of RF output Switches the RF output on or off activated Activated sweeps Mod Gen block i ModGen Config Modulation IT on The internal modulation sources are configured in this block Also the LF sweep can be activated here An internal LF generator is available as the internal source for the analog modulations AM FM and PM Different modulation shapes sine and rectangle are offered The internal modulation signals are provided at the LF output at the front of the instrument The LF output signal and the modulations sources for the analog modulations AM FM and PhiM can be selected independently from each other A pulse generator optional provides single and double pulse modulation with selectable pulse widths and periods The R amp S SMB Signal Generator offers three different swee
159. bps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured For data exchange in a LAN each connected PC or instrument must be accessible via an IP address or via an unambiguous computer name In the Environment Network Settings section of the Setup 1407 0812 62 1 19 E 2 Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN R amp S SMB menu three modes of assigning the IP address or computer name can be selected The correct mode selection depends on the setup of the network Networks using DHCP The R amp S SMB is preconfigured for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol In these networks an available IP address is automatically assigned to the R amp S SMB The R amp S SMB provides an unambiguous computer name in the network via the DHCP request The DHCP server in the network must consider this name and pass it to the DNS server in order to ensure that the R amp S SMB can be addressed in the network Each R amp S SMB is assigned an individual computer name in the factory This name can be queried and changed in Environment Network Settings section of the Setup menu The mode setting is Auto DHCP Networks using fixed IP addresses In networks using fixed IP addresses the addresses are mostly assigned by the network administrator A fixed IP address must be entered in the Environment Network Settings section of the Setup menu see dentifying the R amp S SMB in the Network
160. can operate the R amp S SMB from any remote PC in the network using the VNC protocoll For instance the user can control one or more R amp S SMBs from a desk that is part of a test assembly located in another section of the building A VNC client programm for Windows operating systems is provided on the R amp S SMB CD ROM included in delivery VNC client programms for other operating systems are available free of charge on the internet Remote control of the instrument via the LAN interface is described in Chapter 5 section Remote Control via LAN Interface The configuration of the R amp S SMB for networking is performed in the Environment section of the Setup menu Connection to the Network ATTENTION Risk of network errors Connecting errors may affect the entire network We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the network administrator Do not connect or disconnect the network cable until the instrument is switched off standby Only then the network connection can be reliably detected and impairments to instrument operation can be avoided The instrument is connected to the LAN with the aid of a commercial RJ 45 cable suitable for a 10 100Mbps connection attached to the LAN interface at the rear of the instrument The connector is described in chapter 8 Maintenance and Interfaces Configuring the R amp S SMB for Network Operation The network interface functions with 10 100M
161. case and entries are automatically confirmed when the entry or selection field is exited In the case of front panel control or operation from the keyboard previous values can be restored as long as the new value is not confirmed i e the entry is not completed This can be done with the key Restores previous values Press the key before Press the Esc key before the the entries are confirmed entries are confirmed 1407 0812 62 3 16 E 2 R amp S SMB Menu Operation Menu Operation Menus are operated with the aid of the Winbar buttons and with the and keys on the front panel The Winbar can be called to the front with the key e The key moves the cursor to the block diagram All active menus are hidden They are still open and can be diplayed again with the key e The key closes an active menu e The key calls the Winbar to the front The open menus are displayed after pressing the associated Winbar button Note The key also closes the active menu if the cursor is at the highest menu level Displays the block diagram Press the DIAGRAM key Press CTRL D Click function block in the foreground Displays a menu in the Press the associated button Press Click the respective button in foreground CTRL F1 to F8 the Winbar Closes an active menu Press the CLOSE key Press CTRL G Click the IE button in the menu bar Hides all menus Click the DIAGRAM key Press CTRL D ps 1407 0812 62 3 17 E 2 Editors
162. cation between controller and instruments and can only be sent by the controller which currently has control of the IEC IEEE bus Universal Commands The universal commands are encoded 10 1F hex They affect all instruments connected to the bus without addressing Table 8 2 Universal Commands VISUAL BASIC command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear IBCMD controller CHR 20 Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC Interface Clear IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout IBCMD controller CHR 17 Locks switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys SPE Serial Poll Enable IBCMD controller CHR 24 Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable IBCMD controller CHR 25 End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure IBCMD controller CHR 21 End of the parallel poll state Addressed Commands The addressed commands are encoded 00 OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners Table 8 3 Addressed Commands VISUAL BASIC Command Effect on the instrument SDC Selected Device Clear IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting
163. ccccceceneeeeees 4 54 E 2 Index Assemblies AISPIAY NEE 4 5 6 8 TEE kee ee 5 17 tee EE 4 34 6 20 Attenuator ee 4 34 6 20 VAN CH mI lt lt EE 9 3 B Block 6 EE 5 16 6 11 Block data not allowed ten 9 4 Boolean PArAMete ccccccecccscensecseccanccceesseecsuetanssanens 5 15 C Cannot access hardware 2001 9 11 Cannot access the EEPROM GO 9 11 Cannot open file 26o0l 9 12 Cannot read file td6Zl 9 12 Cannot write Dep 9 12 CONICET CO amanea Ee 4 48 6 36 CHARACION TE 5 14 Character data not allowed 148 cccscecessseeceneeeeeaes 9 4 Character data too long 7221 9 4 Characters special ccccccccccceccseeceneeseeescseessseessaeetseseees 6 1 CHECK Fron EE 4 8 CHECK DOX TIONG deed ee de A E 3 9 Colon Separator BEE 5 17 Column Separator Imp Exp List Mode data 4 59 6 53 Column Separator Imp Exp User Corr data 4 42 6 29 Comma SCD AIAION HE 5 17 Command GOOIKCS EE 8 4 COS CHOU OR geed 6 1 EE Eet 5 11 EE ee eer tee 5 13 parameters oils cant oth ete Maman alin ected hon chase staat 5 15 Ee eet 5 14 gue SUONA eebe E ee 5 14 Ge e 5 20 EE eeh 5 10 Eege 5 12 SV NGHIORIZAUOR EE 5 20 e 8 4 Command Error 2001 9 4 Command protected 207 9 4 COMMON commands EEN 6 3 CompactFlash Card 1 18 Computer name Setup ccccccccecceeecseseceeeseeeessaeesseees 4 12 Connection to external controller 1 21 gett el EE 1 21 Copy instrument seitgs 4 23 6 16 ET ee 4 5 6 9 Coupling
164. ce ASCIl Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter 1407 0806 32 5 17 E 2 Instrument Model and Command Processing R amp S SMB Instrument Model and Command Processing The block diagram in the figure below shows how SCPI commands are serviced in the instrument The individual components work independently and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of so called messages Input unit with input buffer e Command recognition g Data set IEC IEEE bus Ethernet Status reporting system vy Instrument hardware g IEC IEEE bus d Output unit with Ethernet output buffer Instrument model in the case of remote control via IEC IEEE bus or TCP IP network Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATORP gt as defined in IEEE 488 2 or the interface message DCL If the input buffer is full the traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed Subsequently the traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command rec
165. ce J SWEep POWer DWELI 2 s 10s The command sets the time taken for each level step of the sweep Note lt is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times SYSTem DISPlay UPDate OFF Example SWE POW DWEL 12ms sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a level sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI 40 ms_ 0 1 ms Device specific SOURce SWEep POWer EXECute The command triggers a sweep The command is only valid for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep POWer MODE SING1le The command corresponds to the manual control command EXECUTE SINGLE SWEEP The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example SWE POW MODE SING sets the single cycle mode of the level sweep SWE POW EXEC triggers a level sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 81 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO MANual STEP The command sets the cycle mode of the level sweep Parameters AUTO Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep MANual The trigger system is not active Each level step of the sweep is triggered individually either by varying the Current Level value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a POW MAN command under remote control With manual control the level increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value specified under S
166. com R amp S SMB Contents Remote Control Basics Contents Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics 1407 0806 32 5 Remote Control Basics ee 5 1 Introduction Remote Control Basics 5 1 GO TUING otare is Micke Sesto aed teresa r 5 2 SWITGHOVEr te Remote COMO EE 5 2 Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus onnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnensnnnnnnnnnnsennnnrrrerennnne 5 3 Remote Control via LAN Intertace 5 4 Interface and Device Messages AAA 5 9 Ji Ce LEE 5 9 Device Messages Commands and Device Hesponses 5 9 SCPI Command Structure and Gvnmtan 5 10 Structure of a Command LING sessir e aa 5 13 RESPONSES 10 EE 5 14 PITS E 5 15 Overview of Syntax Elements 5 17 Instrument Model and Command Processing ensesnnnensensernnreeenrrrrrrrrresnren nn 5 18 HOUA EE 5 18 GOMMAaNG AECOOMMON EEN 5 19 Data Base and Instrument Hardware 5 19 Status Reporting Syste M1 xscecccecccessuenesaecdsceedasetaveassaccessadesereedaseideoansexcene 5 20 CUTOUT OM E 5 20 Command Sequence and Command Gvpnchrontzaton 5 20 EEN erte DEE 5 23 Overview of the Status Hegosier 5 23 Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE 5 24 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register DPE 5 24 Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE 5 25 Application of the Status Reporting Gvstem 5 26 Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems o00nnnnnn0annnnnnenannnne 5 28 l 5 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Remote Cont
167. commands that affect the queried value is not predictable Sending SOURce FREQuency 1E 9 LEVel 80 SOURCE FREOQuency always returns 1E 9 1GHz When SOURce FREQuency 1E 9 FREQuency LEVel 80 is sent however the result is not specified by SCPI The result could be the RF generator frequency before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Command Synchronization In order to prevent an overlapped execution of commands one of commands OPC OPC or WA can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set and has settled By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the respective action to occur see table Synchronization with OPC OPC and WA OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR Setting bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been Setting bit 5 in the SRE executed Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is Sending OPC directly after the command whose returned This is only the case after the processing should be terminated before other commands Operation Complete bit has been set in the can be executed ESR This bit ind
168. components must be of the same length This does not apply to components of length 1 This is interpreted as if the component has the same length as the other components and as if all values are the same as the first value SOURCEL EIO TERE LOO MHZ ee LLO Mize GE E gie A SOURCEL LIST POW ZoBm Ent lee e 3 Select a list If a new empty file has been created with the LIST SEL command this file is selected otherwise an existing list must be selected before the List mode is activated SOURGELYLIST SEil Old Liste 4 Set the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual list steps SOURce1 LIST DWELI1 3ms 5 Set the List mode The List mode determines the way in which the list is processed In the example the list is processed once only or repeatedly depending on the trigger setting SOURcel1 LIST MODE SING 6 Determine the trigger In the example each trigger causes the list to be processed once from beginning to end sOURce LIST TRIGger SOURce SINGle 7 Activate the List mode SOURcel FREQuency MODE LIST 8 Trigger the list depending on the mode SOURce1 LIST TRIGger EXECute 9 Deactivate the List mode SOURcel FREQuency MODE CW Note SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted ee rere e SOURce LIST DELete ALL Ell ISOURCeILIST DEXChange AFILeGATaeg dirty BEER EE ISOUR JIST Eesentegter Loser 1407 0806 3
169. control command MMEM DEL var test saverclL Creates a new directory The name of the new directory can be entered in the New Directory window The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level Remote control command MMEM MDIR var user test Note When the subdirectory is entered it is possible to enter an absolute path name e g var user meas or the path relative to the current directory e g MEAS 4 24 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Signal RF RF Signal RF Overview of RF Signal Settings for the RF output signal are made under RF Signal These settings can be accessed in the block diagram by way of the RF function block or by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the key M The function block is available for the basic unit R amp S SMB frequency option R amp S SMB B10x without additional equipment options The key can be used to activate and deactivate the output signal irrespective of the current entry focus The previous state is restored when the signals are reactivated Remote control command OUTP STAT OFF OUTP STAT ON The activated and deactivated state is indicated in the block diagram by means of the different block color and the status of the On checkbox The disconnected connection to the output is additionally shown when the output is deactivated An active sweep is also indicated in the block Mod Gen Modulation Modulation 3 3 conf
170. controller VISA will detect and configure the R amp S SMB automatically when the USB connection is established No entry of an address string and no separate driver installation is necessary The used USB address string is USB lt vendor Id gt lt product Id gt lt serial number gt OxOAAD is the vendor Id for Rohde amp Schwarz 0x54 is the product Id for R amp S SMB and the serial number is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument Example USB 0x0AAD 0x0054 100001 INSTR 1407 0806 32 5 8 E 2 R amp S SMB Interface and Device Messages Interface and Device Messages The messages transferred via the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus see Section EC IEEE Bus Interface or via a TCP IP network can be divided into two groups interface messages and device messages Interface Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus the ATN control line being active They are used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of an IEC IEEE bus controller Interface commands can be further subdivided into universal commands addressed commands Universal commands act on all devices connected to the IEC IEEE bus without previous addressing addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages
171. ctivated alternatively Each type has 6 modes which differ with respect to the sweep cycle mode continuous individual and step by step and triggering mode automatic internal and external The LF sweep is activated and configured in the Mod Gen block A sweep is set in five basic steps which are shown below taking a frequency sweep as an example 1 Set the sweep range Start Freq and Stop Freq or Center Freq and Span 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Spacing 3 Set the step width Step Lin Log and dwell time Dwell Time 4 Activate the sweep Mode to Auto Single Step or Extern Single Extern Step 5 Trigger the sweep except for Auto mode Execute Single Sweep Current Frequency or External Trigger Signal Notes It is recommended to switch off the GUI update Setup menu for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Frequency Sweep Menu The Frequency Sweep menu is opened in the RF function block or in the menu tree of the key under RF Signal Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction In the top section of the menu the RF sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the RF sweep all sweep modes or to execute the RF sweep Single mode 1407 0806 32 4 44 E 2 R amp S SMB Sweep Mode Reset Sweep Start Freq 100 000 000 0 MHz Stop Freq 500 000 000 0 MHz sl C
172. d are made This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is exclusively operated via remote control Example DISP PSAV ON activates screen saver mode RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF oe 1407 0806 32 6 10 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description FORMat Subsystem The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data that the R amp S Signal Generator returns to the controller This affects all query commands which return a list of numerical data or block data Reference is made to this in the descriptions of the commands eg Tee Tee Tee FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed a S FORMat SREGister ASCH BINary HEXadecimal OCTal RER FORMat DATA ASCii PACKed The command determines the data format which the R amp S Signal Generator uses to return data When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument the instrument detects the data format automatically In this case the value set here is irrelevant Parameters ASCii Numerical data is transferred as plain text separated by commas PACKed Numerical data is transferred as binary block data The format within the binary data depends on the command The various binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types RST value Resolution Options SCPI Aen L Compliant FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped The command determines the sequence of byt
173. d as soon as it is finished SINGle The list is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SOURce LIST TRIGger EXECute The list is executed once EXTernal The list is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector The list is executed once setting LIST MODE AUTO or step by step in ascending order with each trigger event setting LIST MODE STEP Example TRIGSLIST SOUR EXT selects triggering by means of the external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector Device specific Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 60 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce MODulation Subsystem This subsystem contains the command for switching on off all modulations SOURce MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF Pn E SOURce MODulation ALL STATe ON OFF The command switches the modulations on and off A subsequent command SOUR MOD ALL STAT ON restores the status that was active before the last switch off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the header next to the Level field Example MOD STAT OFF switches off all active modulations Options 1407 0806 32 6 61 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce PHASe Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal relative to a reference signal of the same frequency The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted SOURce PHASe 359 9 deg 359 9 deg DAD ff SOURce PHASe 359 9 deg
174. d independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only Int Ext Int Ext AM Depth Note Selects the internal modulation source for AM modulation Remote control command SOUR AM SOUR INT Selects the external source The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR AM SOUR EXT Selects the internal and external source at the same time This setting enables two tone AM modulation Remote control command SOUR AM SOUR INT EXT Sets the modulation depth in percent With two tone modulation please observe that the set modulation depth is valid for both signals and the sum modulation depth is determined by doubling the set modulation depth This results in overmodulation if the maximal value for modulation depth is exceeded see data sheet Remote control command SOUR AM DEPT 1407 0806 32 Z0P CT 4 63 E 2 Amplitude Modulation AM R amp S SMB AM Sensitivity AM Ext Coupling Source External only Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in V The display only appears in the case of external modulation The modulation depth entered under AM Depth is reached with 1 Volt modulation of the input Remote control command SOUR AM SENS Response 30 Source
175. d site of the Rohde amp Schwarz SMB home page www rohde schwarz com product smb100a This home page always offers the latest information on your signal generator e g also on changes of the firmware update procedure The tables in the sections Hardware and Software list the installed hardware and software options Option L not name of option Opens a dialog with additional information e g on designation license number and expiration date of option For regular options Permanent is indicated in this column Some options are available as trial versions This column shows their expiration date After this date the option is no longer available on the instrument Section Loaded Modules is provided for service purposes It lists all loaded software modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module Install SW Option Setup System Newly purchased software options are enabled in the Install SW Options menu They are ready to operate after they are enabled by means of a key code supplied with the option Option Key foe gp ep ee gp ep Gg ge gp ep Gg gp ep Sg gg Only if the R amp S SMB Signal Generator is equipped with an older firmware version a firmware update prior to enabling the software option may be required The information on the valid firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option The firmware update is described in the service manual instrume
176. defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands An overlapped command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Overlapped commands allow the program to do other tasks while being executed A sequential command is one which always finishes before the next command starts executing Sequential commands are not implemented in the generator however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential commands 1407 0806 32 5 20 E 2 R amp S SMB Instrument Model and Command Processing lf a particular device action can be performed only after the execution of a previous overlapped command the controller must know when the overlapped command has finished The necessary interaction between the controller and the test instrument is called command synchronization Command Sequence According to section Database and Instrument Hardware overlapped execution is possible in principle for all commands of the signal generator Equally setting commands within one command line are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received n order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line see also example in section Database and Instrument Hardware Example Commands and queries in one command line The response from a query combined in a program message with
177. dually either by varying the Current Frequency value using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a FREQ MAN command under remote control With manual control the frequency increases or decreases depending on the direction of the rotary encoder by the value specified under SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing With remote control the frequency increases by the value specified under SWEep FREQ STEP LIN LOG which each sent FREQ MAN command irrespective the value entered there STEP Each external trigger triggers one sweep step only Mode Extern Step The frequency increases by the value entered under SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN linear Spacing or STEP LOG logarithmic spacing Example SWE MODE AUTO selects auto mode for a frequency sweep Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 79 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce SWEep FREQuency POINts lt numeric_value gt The command sets the number of steps in an RF sweep The command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency STEP as follows The following applies for linear sweeps POINts SPAN STEP LIN 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 lf POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing SW
178. e If SOURce SWEep POWer MODE is set to STEP one step is executed The sweep mode has to be set to AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the TRIGGER connectors Example TRIG SWE SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 103 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB UNIT Subsystem The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit is indicated ina command These settings are valid for the entire instrument is ee k UNIT ANGle DEG RAD The command defines the default unit for angles It is valid for all commands which determine angle values It does not influence the manual control parameter unit and the display Example UNIT ANGL DEG sets default unit DEG for all commands which determine angle values RAD Compliant RST value Resolution Options SCPI UNIT POWer V DBM The command defines the default unit for power It is valid for all commands which determine power values It does not influence the manual control parameter unit and the display Example UNIT POW V sets default unit V for all commands which determine power values RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1407 0806 32 6 104 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Contents Chapter 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces 8 Maintenance
179. e POWer LIMit AMPLitude Minimum level Maximum level The command limits the maximum RF output level in CW and SWEEP mode It does not influence the LEVEL display or the response to the POW query command Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example SOURce POWer LIMit AMPLitude 10 or POW LIM 10 limits the RF level to maximum 10 dBm Options SOURce POWer MANual Minimum level Maximum level In Sweep mode SOUR POW MODE SWE the command sets the level for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN Here only level values between the settings SOUR POW STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR POW MAN command As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer OFFSet is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level OFFSet Maximum level OFFSet Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet c Example POW SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode POW MAN 5 dBm sets an RF level of 5 dB
180. e PULM SOURce INT EXT BESCHE EECHER SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance G10K G50 SOURce PGEN OUTPut STATe ON OFF The command switches on off the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument Example PGEN OUTP STAT OFF deactivates output of video sync signal RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF Option R amp S SMB K23 Compliant SOURce PULM DELay 20ns 1s The command sets the pulse delay The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse generation Example PULM DEL 13 us 13 us elapse after a trigger before the first pulse is generated RST value Resolution Options SCPI 20 ns 20 ns Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 7 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce PULM DOUBle DELay 20ns 1s The command sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse Example PULM DOUB DEL 22 us 22 us elapse between the beginning of the first pulse and the beginning of the second pulse in double pulse mode RST value Resolution Options SCPI um 20ns Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific SOURce PULM DOUBle STATe ON OFF The command enables disables double pulse generation The two pulses are generated in one pulse per
181. e Sine State LF Output Activates deactivates the LF Output The modulation signal is output at the LF output connector at the front of the instruments Remote control command SOUR LFO STAT ON PUPH VONAGE EEE UUL Sets the output voltage of the LF output The entered value determines the peak voltage Remote control command 1407 0806 32 4 81 E 2 Pulse Generator Menu LF Gen Freq LF Output LF Gen Shape LF Output R amp S SMB SOUR LFO VOLT 1 V Sets the frequency of the LF generator This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal modulation source Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ 1E3 Selects the shape of the LF generator Remote control command SOUR LFO SHAP SQU Pulse Generator Menu The Pulse Generator menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the key under Mod Gen The same settings can be made in the Pulse Modulation menu of the MOD block Please refer to the description of the menu in section Pulse Modulation page 4 72 Video Sync Signal State Pulse Generator 1407 0806 32 Switches on off the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector Pulse modulation of the RF carrier is activated in the Pulse modulation menu of the Modulation block Remote control command SOUR PGEN OUTP STAT ON 4 82 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot
182. e control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEP DEC DOT Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table the user correction list is exported to or imported from Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEP COL TAB Calls the File Manager for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a user correction list Source or the ASCII file the user correction list is exported destination in Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL SEL Cr user ucor list txt 4 42 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Destination Source User Correction Import Export User Correction 1407 0806 32 User Correction Calls the File Manager for selecting the user correction list to be exported source into an ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported destination in Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXGC SEL Cs iSser ucor7 St Lb Starts the export or import of the selected file When import is selected the ASCII file is imported as user correction list When export is selected the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file Remote control command SOUR CORR DEXC EXEC 4 43 E 2 Sweep Mode R amp S SMB Sweep Mode The R amp S SMB Signal Generator offers three different sweep types frequency sweep level sweep and LF sweep to be a
183. e fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC AFIL CAT in which case the files in the specified directory are read The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXCPAFILSCAT queries the available files with extension txt Response ucorl ucor2 the ASCII files ucor1 txt and ucor2 txt are available e J SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe EXTension TXT CSV The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor import selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs CORR DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed CORR DEXC AFIL CAT queries the available files with extension txt Response listi list2 the ASCII files ucor1 txtand ucor2 txt are available Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1407 0806 32 6 28 E 2 R
184. e generated pulse The width determines the pulse length The pulse width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period Example PULM WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the pulse RST value Resolution Options SCPI Ims 20 ns Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 75 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference frequency ais eg Esai onal SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 10 MHz H Ir SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF Lt SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 4095 a EG SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal a SOURce ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency 10 MHz The command informs the instrument of the frequency of the external reference 10 MHz Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external source The reference must be input at the REF IN input ROSC EXT FREQ 10 MHz informs the instrument that the external reference frequency is 10 MHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI 41OMHz oo de Compliant SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust STATe ON OFF The command determines whether the calibrated OFF or a user defined ON adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency With STATe ON the instrument is no longer in the calibrated state However the calibration value is not changed and the
185. e highest directory level of the memory stick RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific MMEMory CDIRectory lt directory name gt This command changes the default directory This directory is used for all subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them It is also possible to change to a higher directory using two dots Example MMEM CDIR test changes from the current directory level to the subdirectory test RST value Resolution Options SCPI Nat Compliant MMEMory COPY lt source gt lt destination gt This command copies the first specified file to the second specified file Instead of just a file this command can also be used to copy a complete directory together with all its files If lt destination gt is not specified lt source gt is copied to the MMEM CDIR directory Files which already exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message lt is also possible to specify the path using another parameter The command is MMEMory COPY lt file_source gt lt msus_source gt lt file_destination gt lt msus_destination gt The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example MMEM COPY var rs_gen testl savrcl var temp copies the file test1 savrcl1 in the USER directory on the internal CompactFlash Card to the TEMP directory without changing the file name RST value Resolution Opt
186. e request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WA 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence lt short timeout gt OPC A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 3 Reset timeout to former value 4 Clear the error queue with SYStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrupted entries 1407 0806 32 9 22 E 2 R amp S SMB Status Reporting System Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores information on errors which have occurred This information is stored in theerror queue The error queue can be queried via IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet The information is of a hierarchical structure The register status byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its associated mask register service request enable SRE form the uppermost level The STB receives its information from the standard event status register ESR which is also defined in IEEE 488 2 with
187. e specific SOURce LIST MODE AUTO STEP The command specifies how the list is to be processed similar to SOURce SWEep MODE Parameters AUTO Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle Possible trigger settings for gt LIST TRIGger SOURce are AUTO SINGle and EXT STEP Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list processing cycle The list is processed in ascending order The external trigger has to be used setting LIST TRIGger SOURce EXT Example LIST MODE STEP selects step by step processing of the list RST value Resolution Options SCPI Ao o 8 Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 57 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LIST POWer Minimum level Maximum level Minimum level Maximum level block data The command fills the Level part of the selected list with data The data can be given either as a list of numbers list can be of any length and list entries must be separated by commas or as binary block data When block data is transferred 8 4 bytes are always interpreted as a floating point number with double accuracy see the command FORMat DATA RST does not affect data lists Example LIST SEL var lists listmode list3 selects list3 for editing List3 is created if it does not yet exist LIST POW OdBm 2dBm 2dBm 3dBm specifies the level values in list8 The number of level values must correspond to the number of frequency values The previous dat
188. e to the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation check the following The covers of the housing are in place and screwed on Vents are not obstructed Make sure that the air can escape freely through the vents at the sides The minimum distance to the wall should therefore be at least 10 cm The signal levels at the inputs do not exceed permissible limits The outputs of the instrument are not overloaded or incorrectly connected This particularly applies to the maximum permissible back feed at the outputs which is specified in the data sheet The ambient temperature must not exceed the range specified in the data sheet Please also observe the instructions in the following sections and the general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual Protection against Electrostatics 1407 0812 62 To avoid damaging the electronic components of the EUT due to electrostatic discharge produced by contact the use of appropriate protective measures is recommended Putting into Operation R amp S SMB Setting up the Instrument WARNING Risk of injury and instrument damage Safe operation with support feet e Stacked instruments may slip off Secure stacked instruments against slipping e g by locking the feet to the top of the front panel frame The feet must be fully folded in or folded out Only then a stable position of the instrument and reliable operation can be ensured The uniform pressure on the f
189. ected in the same way no matter whether a function block in the diagram a menu in the menu tree a parameter in the menu or an entry in a list or table is concerned e An element is activated by means of the cursor An active element is highlighted by a blue frame EM Source Int Ext k Selects an element Select element by means of Select element by means of Click element the rotary knob or the arrow the arrow keys keys Switching Parameters On Off Setting Parameters A parameter can be activated and deactivated using a button or a check box e The ENTER function of the different control media switches the highlighted element on or off toggle function Colour and label of a button change the check box is ticked or the tick is removed Variation Active 1407 0812 62 3 11 E 2 Setting Parameters R amp S SMB Switches on off Press rotary knob ENTER Press Enter key Click check box or button or TOGGLE ON OFF key Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters Some menus are organized in areas The cursor can be moved either only within an area or between the higher level menu areas This applies to the File Select menus when files are saved or loaded When the menu is called one of the menu areas is highlighted by a blue frame recent data sets recent data sets var smb ucorhigh Wm e Another menu area can be selected highlighted by means of the rotary knob or the arrow keys e Clicking
190. ed in the selected directory Remote control command n a BEER Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located The window to the right lists all files in this directory The file to be deleted or copied can be highlighted The path is indicated above the directory window Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user KURS Selects the file Remote control command n a eu Cuts the selected file It can be pasted into a different directory using the Paste bution Remote control command MMEM DEL var test savercl Copy Copies the selected file It can be pasted into a different or the same directory using the Paste button When pasting the file into the same directory file name Copy of lt filename gt is given automatically When pasting the file into a different directory the original filename is kept Remote control command MMEM COPY var user setl wv var user set2 wv Paste Pastes the file that has been copied or cut before Remote control command n a 1407 0806 32 4 23 E 2 Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key R amp S SMB Rename Delete Create New Directory 1407 0806 32 Renames the selected file or directory The new name can be entered in the New Filename window Remote control command MMEM MOVE test02 dm_igd set2 dm_igd Deletes the selected file Before the file is deleted a message appears prompting the user to confirm deletion of the file Remote
191. ed with Variation Active Remote control command SOUR POW STEP INCR 1dBm Variation Active RF Level Activates the user defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary knob ON The level value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user defined step width which is entered under Variation Step Remote control command SOUR POW STEP MODE USER OFF The level value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one unit at the cursor position standard operating mode Remote control command SOUR POW STEP MODE DEC Overvoltage Protection The overvoltage protection prevent overloading by an external signal applied to the RF output of the R amp S SMB Signal Generator The overload protection is tripped when the power of the external signal becomes too high A relay opens and interrupts the connection between the RF output and attenuator This condition is indicated in the display header by the OVERLOAD status message gt Reset the overload protection by pressing the key The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset Remote control commands OUTP PROT TRIP OUTP PROT CLE OUTP STAT ON 1407 0806 32 4 35 E 2 RF EMF R amp S SMB RF EMF The power on behavior of the R amp S SMB Signal Generator and the level display in the display header are set in the RF EMF menu EMF Menu The EMF menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF Sr
192. ed in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the pcr string Example SOURce SWHep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 5SPCT The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted as special numerical values In the case of a query the associated numerical value is provided Example Setting command SOURce LFOutput VOLTage MAXimum Query SOURce LFOutput VOLTage Answer 4 MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value DEFault denotes a preset value This value conforms to the default setting as it is called by the RST command UP DOWN increases or reduces the numerical value by one step The step width can be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via UP DOWN INFinity Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses Not A Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are division by zero subtraction or addition of infinite and the representation of missing values Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value unequal to 0 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0 ON or OFF is returned by a query Example Setting command SOURce AM STATe ON Query SOURCe AM STATe Answer 1
193. ed or no numeric data element is sent after the introductory SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid Character 101 The command contains an invalid sign Example A header contains an ampersand SOURCE amp SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Invalid separator 103 The command contains an impermissible sign instead of a separator Example A semicolon is missing after the first command in a command line with several commands FREQ 2MHz POW 25 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Invalid suffix 131 The suffix is not appropriate for this command Example nHz is not defined SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Lists not same length 226 The parts of a list have different lengths This error message is also displayed if only part of a list has been transmitted via IEC bus All parts of the list have to be transmitted always before it is executed Example The POWer list content is longer than the FREQuency list content or only the POWer content is transmitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Missing parameter 109 The command does not contain the required parameters Example Command SOUR FREQ requires the indication of a parameter VGEREOe POW S30 SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register No error 0 This
194. egister Expression data not allowed 178 The command contains a mathematical expression at an impermissible position SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register GET not allowed 105 A Group Execute Trigger GET is within a command line Note A Group Execute Trigger GET is only allowed at the end of a command line or in a Separate command line SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Hardware error 240 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a hardware problem in the device SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 5 E 2 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMB Hardware missing 241 A legal program command or a query could not be executed because of a missing device hardware Example An option is not fitted SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Header suffix out of range 114 The command contains an illegal numeric suffix Example SOURce22 Is not defined for the signal generator SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Illegal parameter value 224 The parameter value is invalid Example An invalid text parameter is indicated LRIGGer SWEeproOURCe TASTS SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Invalid block data 161 The command contains illegal block data Example An END message was received before the expected number of data had been receiv
195. ell Click the row above which the new row is to be inserted Click the Insert Row s button Double click the Save as button Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory Double click the Save button Double click the User Correction Data button Double click Create New List Enter the file name in the File Select menu and select the directory E 2 Help System Help System R amp S SMB The R amp S SMB is equipped with a context sensitive help function A help page is available for each parameter and can be called any time during instrument operation The context sensitive page which is opened with the key is part of a comprehensive help system It is possible to move from this context sensitive page to any page of the help system Note Compiled online help systems are also available for all functions of the R amp S SMB on the CD ROM supplied with the instrument This helo program can be called on any controller with Internet Explorer version V 4 0 and higher Remote contral command RST Contents Index Back Previous Next Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup All Parameters and switching states are preset aleo those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings Be The help function is provided with a navigation bar i e oth
196. emote control EOI End or Identify has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer NDAC Not Data Accepted active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus IEC IEEE Bus Interface Functions Instruments which can be remote controlled via the IEC IEEE bus can be equipped with different interface functions The following table lists the interface functions appropriate for the instrument Table 8 1 lIEC IEEE Bus Interface functions a Handshake source function Source handshake full capability an Handshake sink function acceptor handshake full capability fe remem mooo OO om Service request function Service Request full capability Parallel poll function full capability Remote Local switch over function full capability Reset function Device Clear full capability Trigger function Device Trigger full capability e No controller function 1407 0806 32 8 3 E 2 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMB IEC IEEE Bus Messages Interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the IEC IEEE bus when the ATN control line is active LOW They are used for communi
197. ency accuracy Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description CALibration LEVel STATe ON OFF The command switches on or off use of external level correction data This switch can be used in case of corrupt external level correction data Example CAL LEV STAT ON switches on use of external level correction data RST value Resolution Options SCPI ON Device specific CALibration LEVel MEASure Performs all adjustments which affect the level The aquired correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CAL LEV starts the level adjustment in the mixer range Response 0 the adjustments have been performed successfully RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 7 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB DIAGnostic Subsystem The DIAGnostic system contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and servicing SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands the commands listed here are all Device specific All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not influenced by RST vemmens TT allie DIAGnostic BGINfo CATalog a Oo o Query only DIAGnostic INFO POCounter PE Query only DIAGnostic POINt CATalog PL Query only DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe PL
198. ent file systems to be used the following file naming conventions should be observed The file name can be of any length and no distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase letters The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot All letters and numbers are permitted numbers are however not permitted at the beginning of the file name Where possible special characters should not be used Use of the slashes and should be avoided since they are used in file paths A number of names are reserved by the operating system e g CLOCK CON AUX COM1 COM4 LPT1 LPT3 NUL and PRN In the R amp S Signal Generator all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic extension The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot see the following table containing a list of the file types The two characters and function as wildcards i e they are used for selecting several files The 2 character represents exactly one character while the character represents all characters up to the end of the file name therefore stands for all the files in a directory When used in conjunction with the commands the parameter lt file_name gt is specified as a string parameter with quotation marks It can contain either the complete path or only the file name The same applies for the parameters lt directory_name gt and lt path gt Depending on how much information is prov
199. ent inadvertent deletion or overwriting of system files this directory is not specified in the file menus Files can be exchanged via a memory stick The memory stick has to be connected to the USB interface and accessed via the File menu The files are accessed in a File Select window in the individual menus Depending on the data type a file can either be selected or it can be selected and saved Instrument settings can be saved and loaded In case of saving the current setting is saved to the specified file Lists e g user correction lists can be loaded They can be generated either externally or internally For internal generation a new list must be created in the File Select window which will then be edited in the list editor of the individual menu User Cor Data 1407 0812 62 3 21 E 2 File Management R amp S SMB The files are differentiated according to their extensions each type of file is assigned a specific file content The extension is usually of no consequence to the user since access to the files occurs in the individual menus where only the relevant type of file is available A button in the individual menu calls up the selection of the Select New and File Manager functions After the Select New selection a File Select window for loading saving or creating a file is displayed see the following section File Select Menu page 3 22 After the File Manager selection a menu for managing all files
200. enter Freq 300 000 000 0 MHz sl Span 400 000 000 0 MHz Current Freq 360 000 000 0 MHz Spacing Linear sl Step Lin 1 000 000 00 MHz Dwell Time 10 0 ms The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section The sweep range of the RF sweep can be entered in two ways either by entering the Start and Stop value or by entering the Center and Span The two sets of parameters influence each other in the following way Start Center Span 2 Stop Center Span 2 Center Start Stop 2 Span Stop Start State RF Frequency Sweep Activates deactivates RF sweep mode Note Activating the RF frequency sweep automatically deactivates the Level sweep and LF frequency sweep Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR FREQ MODE CW Mode RF Frequency Sweep Selects the Sweep instrument operating mode and the Sweep mode Auto Sets an automatic repeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle starts at the beginning The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR AUTO SOUR FREQ MODE SWE 1407 0806 32 4 45 E 2 Sweep Mode 1407 0806 32 Single Step Extern Single R amp S SMB Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Sing
201. enus are minimized Active menus are indicated by the buttons in the menu bar 6 Input for external AM FM PhiM signals MOD EXT MOD EXT i Input for external modulation signals LF Output for internal modulation generator signal 1407 0812 62 1 7 E 2 Legend for Front Panel View R amp S SMB 8 RF output RF E RF See data sheet d Output for RF signal and chapter 4 section RF Signal ATTENTION Maximum Input Levels Do not overload the RF output The maximum permissible back feed is specified in the data sheet 9 Keys for switching RF signal and modulations MOD ON OFF Switches the active modulations on See chapter 3 section and off Setting Parameters and chapter 4 section RF ON OFF RF Signal and e Switches the RF signal on and off Modulations 10 Key for winbar WINBAR Toggles between display and See chapter 3 section blanking of the Winbar Setting Parameters 11 Standby on off switch The on off switch switches the instrument from the See chapter 1 section g standby mode to the operating state provided ei Switching On d power switch on the instrument rear is switched on l The yellow LED right is on in the standby mode the green LED left is on when the instrument is ready for operation DANGER Danger of shock hazard The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode 1407 0812 62 1 8 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 843
202. epeated sweep cycle If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Auto mode the cycle continues from the current sweep Setting The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR AUTO SOUR POW MODE SWE Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by the Execute Single Sweep button lf a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start level The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR SING SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW EXEC Sets a step by step sweep cycle If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Level Each sweep step is triggered by a variation of the value in the Current Level entry window The step width is set below at entry field Step If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Level If a different Sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the current level value The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE MAN SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW STEP 0 5 SOUR DON MAN 15 the value entered with command SOUR SWE POW STEP sets the step width The value entered with c
203. equency is set using the commands SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt STOP or MANual Example LFO FREQ MODE SWE sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt STOP MANual become effective RST value Resolution Options SCPI CW 1 DR Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 43 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz 1 MHz This command sets the start frequency for the LF Sweep mode Example ROT activates all presettings LFO SWE MODE AUTO sets the AUTO sweep mode i e each trigger triggers a complete sweep TRIG FSW SOUR SING sets the SINGle trigger mode i e the sweep is triggered by the command LFOutput SWEep EXECute Or TRG LFO FREQ STAR 100 kHz sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz LFO FREQ STOP 200 kHz sets the stop frequency of the LF sweep to 200 kHz LFO FREQ MODE SWE sets the LF sweep mode LFO SWE EXEC a one off LF sweep from 100 kHz to 200 kHz is performed The linear step width is 1 kHz with a dwell time of 15 ms preset values RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 kHz 0 1 Hz Compliant SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STOP 0 1 Hz 1 MHz This command sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep Example LEOSF REO STOP 200 kHz sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep to 200 kHz LFO FREQ STAR 100 kHz sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI
204. er help pages can be called from the context sensitive page via the table of contents the index arrows for scrolling and page internal links Operation of context sensitive help Open the help system The help page for the respective parameter is displayed Close the help system Activate the link The help system branches to the linked page Page Up down 1407 0812 62 Press HELP key Press HELP key again Select link with rotary knob or arrow keys and activate by clicking the rotary knob or ENTER key Select Previous Next or Back in the help window using the arrow keys and activate by clicking the rotary knob or the ENTER key 3 20 Press F1 key Select link using the arrow keys and activate with the Enter key Click link Click Previous Next or Back Select Previous Next or Back in the help window using the arrow keys and activate with the Enter key E 2 R amp S SMB File Management Move indicated help window Move indicated help window Click the scroll bar and move area using the rotary knob area using the arrow keys to the desired position and the arrow keys Select an item in the table Select Content in the help Select Content in the help Click Content of contents window using the arrow keys window using the arrow keys and activate by clicking the left right and activate with the Click item The help page of the item is rotary knob or the Enter key displayed
205. er instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signaled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history Remote control command SYST SERR 1407 0806 32 9 3 E 2 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages The following list contains all error messages defined in SCPI in alphabetical order SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments The errors are assigned negative numbers The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Note The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Block data not allowed 168 The command contains legal block data which are not allowed at this point Example The command SOUR FREQ requires a numeric parameter FREQ 13a is not allowed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data not allowed 148 The character data is prohibited for this command or at this point of the command Example Command SOURce FREQuency requires a numeric parameter FREQ SEC is not a
206. ers the list manually This button is available only if Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR SING SOUR LIST TRIG EXEC Resets the list to the starting point Remote control command SOUR LIST RES Enters the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of a list Step in list operating modes Auto Single and Extern Single In these modes a complete list is processed either once or continuously In list operating modes Step and Extern Step the set dwell time does not affect signal generation In this case the duration of a list step is determined by the time between two internal or external trigger events Remote control command SOUR LIST DWEL 10 ms Sets the list index in Step mode Remote control command n a Activates deactivates RF output blanking If activated blanking occurs on all frequency changes If deactivates blanking is always disabled Remote control command OUT BLAN LIST STAT ON Starts the determination of the hardware setting for the selected list The data determined in this way is stored along with the list lt may be necessary to deliberately activate list learning in the event of greatly altered environmental conditions that require new hardware settings If this is not done a previously learned hardware setting will continue to be used when list mode is switched on State On If no setting is available e g
207. erwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control The instrument is remote controlled The instrument can be switched from remote control to manual control by means of remote control only e g with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC generator the key is disabled The key is disabled by remote control with the command LLO Status information displayed in the Info line RFSweep LevelSweep LFSweep ALC On Auto S amp H 1407 0806 32 The indicated sweep is enabled The status of the automatic level control is indicated ON automatic level control permanently on Auto automatic level control is automatically adapted to the operating states S amp H automatic level control off recalibration of the level whenever the level or frequency is set Sample and hold mode 9 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Error Messages AttFixed Attenuator fixed mode Is active The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated The range is displayed under Attenuator Fixed Range in the Level menu UCorr User Correction is active The level is corrected by the given values in the selected user correction list Correction is performed by the user defined list values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency With frequencies which are not contained in the list the level correction is determined by
208. es 10 Index Service Manual Instrument Safety Instructions Tabbed Divider 1 Chapter 1 Performance Test 2 Chapter 2 Adjustments 3 Chapter 3 Repair 4 Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options 5 Chapter 5 Documents 1407 0806 32 RE E 2 amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ EC Certificate of Conformity Certificate No 2007 11 This is to certify that Equipment type Stock No Designation SMB100A 1406 6000 02 Signal Generator SMB100M 1406 6000 42 Signal Generator SMB B1 1407 3005 02 Reference Oscillator OCXO complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits 2006 95 EC relating to electromagnetic compatibility 89 336 EEC revised by 91 263 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards EN 61010 1 2001 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 A3 2003 EN 55011 1998 A1 1999 A2 2002 Class B EN 61000 3 2 2000 A2 2005 EN 61000 3 3 1995 A1 2001 For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility the limits of radio interference for Class B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used as a basis Affixing the EC conformity mark as from 2007 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 D 81671 Munchen Munich 2007 03 2
209. es sera asbercnerd coma s gestation A aa 1 15 Start Display and Booting the R amp S GM 1 15 SWEN Ee 1 16 EE 1 16 aU lave t 0 ue EE 1 17 Default SeN EE 1 17 Linux Operating SY SC EE 1 18 Connecting an External Keyboard and Mouse 1 18 Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 1 19 Connection to the N twork cccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseaaas 1 19 Remote Access via an External CGontroller ne 1 21 Configuration for Remote Access via UItr VNC ccccesseeceeeeeeeeeees 1 21 1 1 E 2 R amp S SMB Introduction Putting into Operation 1 Putting into Operation Introduction Putting into Operation Chapter 1 Putting into Operation explains the control elements and connectors of the Signal Generator R amp S SMB with the aid of the front and rear views and describes how to put the instrument into operation It also describes the connection of peripherals such as keyboard and mouse A detailed description of the device interfaces is given in Chapter 8 Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces Specifications of interfaces can be seen in the data sheet Chapter 2 Getting Started gives an overview of generator functions and introduces the operating concept Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in Chapter 3 Manual Operation The complete manual is provided on the CD ROM in printable pdf format Menus and instrument functio
210. es the current hardware status Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Questionable Condition register RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Example STAT OPER PTR 32767 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus QUEStionable register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register Example STAT OPER NTR 0 a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Questionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 86 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description STATus QUEStionable ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus QUEStionable register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are enabled for the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Example STAT OPER ENAB 1
211. es within a binary block This only affects blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally Parameters NORMal the R amp S Signal Generator expects with setting commands and sends with queries the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating point number first and the most significant byte last SWAPped the R amp S Signal Generator expects with setting commands and sends with queries the most significant byte of each IEEE 754 floating point number first and the least significant byte last Example FORM BORD SWAP the data is transferred with the most significant bit first RST value Resolution Options SCPI NORMal TL Ee 1407 0806 32 6 11 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB FORMat SREGister ASCH BINary HEXadecimal OCTal The command determines the numerical format which is returned when the status registers are queried Parameters ASCii the register content is returned as a decimal number BiNary the register content is returned as a binary number B is placed in front of the number HEXadecimal the register content is returned as a hexadecimal number H is placed in front of the number OCTal the register content is returned as an octal number Q is placed in front of the number Example FORM SREG HEX the register content is returned as a hexadecimal number 1407 0806 32 6 12 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description KBOard Subsystem The KBOard system contains the comm
212. escribed in chapters 5 and 6 Operating Concept The operating concept of the R amp S SMB enables the user to make settings as intuitively as possible and at the same time gives a permanent overview of characteristics of the generated signal and of the current instrument state Numerous on line help functions support user settings The block diagram is the core of the operating concept The graphics display showing the current configuration and the signal flow in the form of a block diagram is the core of the operating concept of the Signal Generator R amp S SMB The block diagram gives an overview of signal configuration and the graphical elements can be accessed for operation The desired element is selected by means of the rotary knob and the associated setting function is called by clicking this button Required menus are displayed on the block diagram which is displayed again in the foreground whenever the key is pressed Permanent display of frequency and level of the RF output signal The main characteristics of the RF signal frequency and level are permanently displayed in the header section of the screen and can be directly set in the display fields after the or key is pressed Status messages for the output signal are displayed in addition to frequency and level Freq Level 1 000 000 000 O or 0 00 fien Operation via the graphics interface Menus are assigned to the specific function blocks in the block diagram The func
213. escription SINGle One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SWEep FREQ EXEC Of TRG Of TRIG FSW IMM The mode has to be set to AUTO SOURce SWEep FREQ MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on Example TRIG FSW SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector SINGIe RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific TRIGger PSWeep IMMediate The command immediately starts an RF level sweep The command is only effective for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep POWer MODE AUTO in combination with TRIG PSW SOUR SING The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example SWE POW MODE AUTO selects the triggered sweep mode i e a trigger is required to start the sweep TRIG PSW SOUR AUTO sets the Single trigger mode i e a trigger starts a single sweep TRIG PSW starts a single RF level sweep RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 101 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB TRIGger PSWeep S
214. eters NORMal The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is available LNOise Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced see data sheet HDEViation Frequency modulation with full setting range for FM deviation The range for modulation bandwidth is reduced see data sheet Example FM MODE queries mode for frequency modulation Response NORM normal mode the maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is available RST value Resolution Options SCPI NORMal Compliant SOURce FM SENSitivity The command queries the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in Hz V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR FM SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting SOUR FM DEViation This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example FM DEV DEZ sets a modulation deviation of 5 KHz FM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the MOD EXT input Response 553 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000HZ V RST value Resolution Options SCPI s S Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 34 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce FM SOURce EXT INT INT EXT The c
215. etwork as the instrument that is used to forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network 4 13 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB DNS Server Address Mode Preferred DNS Server Alternate DNS Server 1407 0806 32 We recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote control command SYST COMM IPAD NETW GAT 456 Selects if the DNS server address is assigned automatically or manually The selection is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed In case of manual input of DNS server address we recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Auto DHCP The DNS server address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assignment of address DHCP in order to use this function Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE AUTO Static The DNS server address is assigned manually Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS MODE STAT Only for Static mode Enters the preferred DNS server address manually The new entry is only accepted and the preferred DNS server address changed after the Accept button Is pressed Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS PREF 7 8 9 10 Only for Static mode Enters the alternate DNS server address manually This
216. fective if OF FSet is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula 300 KHz OFFSet RF ma OF FSet Example FREQ 500kHz sets the frequency of RF output signal A to 500 kHz RST value Options Correlation 1 GHz FREQ for FREQ MODE SWE linked to Compliant sweep frequency SOURce FREQuency CW FlXed RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines whether the current frequency setting is retained or whether the stored frequency setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded RST does not affect this setting Parameters INCLude The stored frequency is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded EXCLude The RF frequency is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded The current frequency is retained Example FREQ RCL INCL the stored frequency is set if the Recall command is called Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 37 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce FREQuency MANual STARt STOP In Sweep mode SOUR FREQ MODE SWE the command sets the frequency for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR SWE MODE MAN Here only frequency values between the settings SOUR FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR FREQ MAN command As with the Frequency value entered in the header the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration
217. fic SOURce CORRection CSET DATA POWer POINts The command queries the number of level values in the selected table The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example CORR CSET var Tists ucor ucorl selects the table ucorl CORR CSET DATA POW POIN queries the number of level values in the table ucor1 Response 440 the table ucor1 contains 440 level values RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRection CSET DELete lt table name gt The command deletes the specified table The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR CSET CAT in which case the file in the specified directory is deleted The command is an event and therefore has no RST value The numerical suffix under SOURce is irrelevant Example MMEM CDIR var lists ucor selects the directory for the user correction files CORR CSET DEL UCORL deletes the table ucorl RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 27 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce CORRection DEXChange AFILe CATalog The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export import of user correction data The individual files are separated by commas The ASCII files are stored with th
218. g RF Zween 4 48 6 80 Span RF sween a ricrea aaa 4 48 6 39 SPECIAL CHAlACI EE 6 1 Souare DIACK EE 5 11 SRE service request enable register cccccceeeeeees 5 24 SRO Service reques BEE 6 5 Sandy MOTE ee een 1 8 Sla EE ee deg 4 48 6 39 Start Freq LF Sween 4 80 6 44 Stat E 4 53 6 70 Star Stop Gul Update ek 4 5 6 94 Sale BAL eene ele El 4 38 6 67 Slate LIST Moden cores susyecatet anid ved i eiae AETERNA 4 55 State Pulse Generator 4 82 State Pulse Modulaton 4 72 6 74 State Pvideo Sync Zong 4 82 State User Correction wu ccccccccccccecceecesenseeeneenesnes 4 40 6 32 State Video Sync Signal 6 72 Slale tesi DOIN EE 4 8 6 9 Status register Ooverview 5 23 Status reporting System ccccecccseeccssseeeeaneeecnseessaneeeees 5 23 Status reporting system Commiegnde ees 6 84 SITB Stats EE 5 24 Step Level Sween erue aneia ea enai 4 53 6 83 Step Lin LF Zween 4 80 6 47 Step Lin RF Sween 4 48 6 80 Step Log LF Sween 4 80 6 48 Step Log RF ween 4 48 6 81 Step width Frequency asaaanenaneenennenenenneeenene 4 28 6 40 Step width Level ween 4 53 6 83 Step width RF ween 4 48 6 80 Stop Freg LF ween 4 80 6 44 Stop Freq RF Zween 4 48 6 40 SOP OVE en dag as oe eege 4 53 6 71 String data not allowed 756 9 9 SMAI GS ee Ae ee dE 5 16 Subnet Mask Setup 4 13 6 93 Eege 5 12 Suffix not allowed r 726 9 9 S MX TOO TONG CN 9 9 Sweep Center frequency
219. g the or key under System GES Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual supplied Remote control command CAL ALL RER Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency Remote control command CAL FREQ MEAS Level Performs all adjustments which affect the level The aquired correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality Remote control command CAL LEV MEAS Use ext Level Correction Data Switch on or off use of external level correction data see service manual chapter 2 Adjustment This switch can be used in case of corrupt external level correction data Remote control command CAL LEV STAT ON 1407 0806 32 4 4 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings Hardware Config Setup System In the Hardware Config menu the installed assemblies together with their variants and revision states can be displayed for servicing purposes The Hardware Config menu is opened using the SETUP or MENU key under System unter Operation Time h 0 Power On Count 0 Assembly Part Number SMEB100M 1406 6000k42 Assembly Part Number More RF Board 1406 7007 02 MODFPGA ma Section Counter in the upper part of the menu shows the Operation Hours and the number of power on Power On Counter Remote control command DIAG INFOQ OL
220. g to Manual Control Local Key page 4 17 e Configuring the generator and its interfaces in the Setup menu e g setting the IEC IEEE bus address starting an adjustment querying instrument data section General Configuration of Instrument Setup Key page 4 3 e Calling up the online help using the key section Help Setup Help page 4 17 e Querying messages using the key section Messages Info Key page 4 78 e Loading and storing complete instrument settings in the File menu section Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key page 4 19 The RF signal is configured in the RF function block e CW mode section RF Signal RF page 4 25 e Frequency and Level Sweep mode section Sweep Mode page4 44 The analog modulations are activated in the Mod function block e Amplitude Modulation section Amplitude Modulation AM page 4 62 e Frequency Modulation section Frequency Modulation FM page 4 65 e Phase Modulation section Phase Modulation PhiM page 4 68 e Pulse Modulation section Pulse Modulation page 4 72 The internal LF generators the LF frequency sweep and the pulse generator is configured in the Mod Gen function block e LF Frequency Sweep section LF Frequency Sweep Menu page 4 76 e LF Output section LF Output Menu page 4 81 1407 0806 32 4 1 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings Overview of General Ins
221. gram on the R amp S SMB must be uninstalled or the VNC server service disabled R amp S SMB To enhance security also communication on the network via Ultr VNC program should be disabled in the firewall The Ultr VNC program is available on the Internet as a free of charge download or on the R amp S SMB CD ROM Following the instructions on the Internet the program can be copied onto the external Windows PC Only the program component VNC Viewer is required Note The VNC Viewer program is included in the download for the installation of the Ultrt VNC program on the signal generator if Full installation was selected in the Select Component panel In this 3 4 case the program ultr vncviewer exe can be copied to the Windows PC Install VNC Viewer program component on the PC Start VNC Viewer program component on the PC x Connection aa VNC Server 192 168 1 1 sl EF hoskdisplay or host part Quick Options Ge AUTO Auto select best settings coment C ULTRA gt Mbit Experimental Cancel LAN gt TMbit s Max Colors Cacal MEDIUM gt 128Kbit s Max Colors C MODEM 19 128Kbit s 256 Colors C SLOW e 19kkbits 256 Colors Fuzzy T View Only T Auto Sealing Options IT Use OSMPlugin No Plugin detected sl Config T Drouudene ster Enter IP address or host name of R amp S SMB in input line VNC Server Initialize the connection by pressing the Connect butt
222. h disable specific service functions authorized personnel of R amp S Service Departments only These levels are identified by the suffix under PROTect The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is activated No password is required for activation A password must be entered to deactivate the protection level The password for the first level is 123456 This protection level can be used to lock out internal adjustments The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Example SYST PROT1 ON activates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are only possible after deactivating the lock out SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 deactivates protection level 1 Internal adjustments are enabled again RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 96 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SYSTem SERRor This command returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example WSYST2SERR queries all errors existing in the error queue Response weZz2i Sevtangs conrliace lbs Input Voltage OUL OT range the two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was last queried RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SYSTem TIME 0 23 0 59 0 59 The comma
223. he architecture of a LAN remote control connection is described in detail in the following Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Application SCPI SCPI 3 Presentation XDR VXI 11 RFC 1014 1 2 Session ONC RPC RFC 1057 Transport TCP UDP RFC 793 Network IP RFC 791 Data Link Ethernet 802 3 8802 3 8802 3 Physical 802 3 LOBASE T Fig 8 2 Example for LAN remote control based on the OSI reference model Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR legal RPC messages are known as VXI 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups program messages control command to the instrument response messages values returned by the instrument service request Spontaneous queries of the instrument and low level control messages interface messages A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels a core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel program response and low level control messages The abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service request
224. he RF function block always corresponds to the RF output level Any level offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Level in header RF output level Level in menu Level offset Level offset by the instrument Offset in the Level menu M OE Get Level at the output dose gt of the instrument gain Lev in the header RF output level area of the screen Amplitude in the Level menu The level offset is entered in the Level menu Here it is also possible to set the level without taking the offset into consideration and to make other settings such as level offset attenuator mode power on state The RF output is protected against overloading by an external signal applied to the RF output see section Overvoltage Protection 1407 0806 32 4 32 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Level Level Menu The Level menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF RFE Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The offset free level level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the menu The attenuator mode is set in the Attenuator Settings section The step width which is used when setting the level using the rotary knob with Variation Active On is set in the User Variation section Level Settings Limit 30 00 dBm Offset o 00 dB Attenuator
225. he Software Options menu shows the firmware version of the instrument software as well as all installed hardware and software options Note Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a key code The activation code is supplied with the software option How to install options is described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument Most hardware options need to be installed at an authorized Rohde amp Schwarz service shop The Software Options menu is opened using the or key under System Package More SMB100M Base Software 02 04 222 R amp S COMPASS WS Hardware Options _ ze es SMB B1 SMB B102 okHzto Software Options Internal mono SMBK22 SMBK23 Remote control commands OPT Response SMB B106 SMB K23 TDN Response Rohde amp Schwarz SMB100A 1400 0000k02 342988 2 02 0 0 Release 1407 0806 32 4 6 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings The Firmware section of the menu shows the firmware version and the version of the software platform Note Your R amp S SMB is delivered with the latest firmware version available Firmware updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications are provided on the Internet at the downloa
226. he common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example SOURce FM MODE NORMal SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the SOURce command system subsystem FM i e they have two common levels When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below SOURCce FM The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows SOURce FM MODE NORMal INTernal FREQuency 1kHz However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example SOURce FM MODE NORMal SOURce FM INTernal FREQuency 1kHz 1407 0806 32 5 13 E 2 SCPI Command Structure and Syntax R amp S SMB Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example sSOURce AM EXTernal COUPling Answer AC 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example SOURce FREQuency MAX Answer 1E3 4 Boolean values are returned as 0 for OF
227. he currently selected list is displayed Important Save list only after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Frequency Power Hz dB 400 000 000 00 3 00 2 4noo000 0 a Frequency Hz Enter the frequency to which the level correction value applies Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET SEL Ucorl1 SOUR CORR CSET DATA FREQ 100MHz Power dB Enters the level correction value to which the specified frequency applies Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET SEL Ucor SOUR CORR CSET DATA POW 1dB 0 8dB 4 40 E 2 R amp S SMB Import Export User Correction 1407 0806 32 Goto Insert Row s Save As Save User Correction Selects row for editing If Goto row is selected a window opens for entering the requested row Remote control command n a it is not possible to change individual positions of the list Insert a new row before the marked row Remote control command n a Open the file menu to save the list under a new name Each list is saved to the R amp S SMB Signal Generator CompactFlash Card as a separate file with the file prefix uco The file name and the directory to which the file is saved are user selectable Important Save list only after filling both columns frequency and level otherwise the entries are lost Remote control command n a The list is saved under its current name Important Save list only
228. he following applies for linear sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts STOP STARt STEP LIN 1 The following applies for logarithmic sweeps and STARt lt STOP POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 lf POINTs changes the value of STEP is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN LOG The command is always effective for the currently set sweep spacing Example LFO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 2 kHz LFO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz LFO SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing LFO SWHSPOIN 11 sets 11 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing The sweep step width STEP is automatically set to 2 kHz RST value Resolution Options Correlation 100 1 The value of Device specific LFO SWE STEP is adjusted adapted to instrument automatically properties 1407 0806 32 6 46 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SOURce LF1 LF2 The command selects the source for the LFsweep Example SWE LFS LF2 selects LF generator 2 as the LF frequency sweep source LF RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LINear LOGarithmic The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Example LFO SWE SPAC LIN selects linear sweep spacing RST value Resol
229. he instrument in alphabetical order The positive error codes mark the errors specific of the instrument The error text being entered into the error event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error code Below the error text there is an explanation as to the respective error Note The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes Adjustment data invalid 183 Adjustment data are invalid and must be restored Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated again by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Adjustment data missing 182 Adjustment data are missing Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Adjustment failed 180 Adjustment could not be executed Remedy The adjustment data have to be generated first by an internal or external adjustment or to be loaded into the device see section Adjustment SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot access the EEPROM 202 A error occurs when writing or reading a EEPROM Example The EEPROM is defect SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot access hardware 200 The data transmission to a module was un
230. he new password Remote control commands n a Confirm New Password User Enters the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password buiton is pressed Remote control commands n a 1407 0806 32 4 9 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB New Password VNC Confirm New Password VNC Old password Security New Password Security Confirm New Password Security USB Device Security LAN Connection Security Security Password 1407 0806 32 Enters the new password The VNC password is required for remote access to the instrument via Ultr VNC see chapter 1 The default password is instrument Remote control commands n a Enters the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password buiton is pressed Remote control commands n a Enters the currently used password Default is 123456 The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface Remote control commands n a Enters the new password Only numerics are permitted Remote control commands n a Enters the new password for conformation The new password is only valid after the Change Password buiton is pressed Remote control commands n a Enables disables the USB interfaces Any device connected to the USB interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The setting requi
231. he preset is Auto In this mode the level control is automatically adapted to the operating conditions Level control can be switched to Sample amp Hold or On for particular applications The Sample amp Hold state level control Off is recommended e g for two tone measurements with two R amp S SMB Signal Generators lf Sample amp Hold is selected the level is recalibrated for every level and frequency setting For this purpose level control is activated briefly at a defined signal the level adjuster is then held at the attained value and level control is deactivated NOTE The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMB is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hold In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after each frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Automatic Level Control Menu The Auto Level Control menu is opened in the RF Mod function block or using the key under RF S DIE REON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The combined Auto Level Control menu provides access to the automatic level control settings in the upper section Au
232. he sweep range LFOutput FREQuency STARt 4 kHz LFOutput FREQuency STOP 10 kHz 2 Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing LFOutput SWEep FREQuency SPACing LIN 3 Set the step width and dwell time LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LINear Ech HZ LFOutput SWEep FREQuency DWELI 20 ms 4 Determine the sweep mode LFOutput SWhHep MODE AUTO 5 Determine the trigger TRIGgerO0 SOURce SINGle 6 Activate the sweep LFOutput FREQuency MODE SWEep 7 Trigger the sweep depending on the mode LFOUCPUL SWEGO EXECure The keyword SOURCe is optional and can be omitted PE Kand SOURce LFOutput FREQuency Al SOURce LFOutput F REQuency MANual 0 1 Hz 1 MHz Hz O SOURce LFOutput F REQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep SOURce LFOutput FREQuency STARt 0 1 Hz 1 MHz T ISOURSeJLFOuputSWEepEFREOuenoy Ex Eome FISOURceLFOuiputSWEepLFREQuencyiMODE Lama er JI ISOURceJLFOuputSWEepEFREOuenoy POs Loes vane SOURGeLFOuiputSWEepl FREQuency SOURce inpe E LISOURceJLFOLputSWEepEFREQueney SPACng LNear LOGarthmie FSOURGeLFOuiptSWEepLFREQuency STEP LINeT Lee ema a FISOURGeLFOuiptSWEepEFREQuency STEP LOGaninme 001 sopor eor soumemrowoevore Jova S 1407 0806 32 6 42 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LFOutput FREQuency 0 001 V 4 V The command sets the frequency of the LF signal for CW mode SOUR MODE CW mode The setting is valid for all analog modulations AM FM PhiM with internal modula
233. he values are given in the data sheet Example POW STAR 20 dBm sets the start level for the level sweep to 15 dBm RST value Resolution Options 30dBm foad Compliant SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 0 dB 100dB The command sets the step width for the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as the level values and variation mode SOUR POW STEP MODE USER Is selected The command is linked to setting Variation Step for manual control i e the command also sets the step width of the rotary knob for Variation Active on Example SOURce POWer STEP INCRement 2 Of POW STEP 2 sets the step width for entering the RF level to 2 dB RST value Resolution Options 14d Ioneg o 1 Devicespecific 1407 0806 32 6 70 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce POWer STEP MODE USER DECimal This command activates USER or deactivates DECimal the user defined step width used when varying the level value with the level values UP DOWN The command is linked to setting Variation Active for manual control i e the command also activates deactivates the user defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary knob Example POW STEP 2 sets the step width for the level setting to 2 dB POW STEP MODE USER actives this step width for level variation with the rotary knob manual control and with level values UP DOWN remote control RST value Resolution Options DECimal i 7 Device
234. icates that the previous Disabling bit 4 MAV of the SRE register setting has been completed Alternative Service request or timeout method with enabled MAV bit see below WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command whose processing commands sent before WAI have been should be terminated before other commands are executed executed Note While waiting it is still possible to send messages to the device 1407 0806 32 5 21 E 2 Instrument Model and Command Processing R amp S SMB Command synchronization by means of a WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the R amp S signal generator to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Send the overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a servic
235. ided either the values specified in the parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM CDIR default directory are used for the path setting in the commands In the example below the current instrument setting is always stored in the file test1 ss inthe directory user on the internal CompactFlash Card MMEM STOR STAT 0 var rs_gen testl ss If the complete path is specified the file is stored in the specified path MMEM CDIR var rs_gen MMEM STOR STAT 0 testl ss If the parameter only contains the file name the file is stored in the default directory which was selected with the MMEM CDIR command List of file extensions assigned automatically in R amp S Signal Generator Instrument State Instrument settings User Correction User defined level correction values UCO 1407 0806 32 6 14 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description ERREECHEN wgeseg om 0 oww C S A T umemo comey Leieren rae wgnestzer Lamesch Diener wgnespen Losse Il mewone ll L wgnesteueni S L enen wgnesfgee Less Il Diener wgneungeerer Lee JI Diener PMMEMory MOVE L sche 1 Diener PwMeMoysis oss ll PMEMoryRDIRecioy Lenze Il iMEMorySTOReSTATe odern SO MMEMory CATalog lt path gt This command reads out the subdirectories and files in the specified directory If no directory is specified the default directory selected with the MMEM CDIR command is read out The response has the following format lt sed
236. ig contig contig config On On IT On T On Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freg Sweep Level Sweep The RF signal is generated with the set frequency and level This is the default mode Sweep The RF signal is generated as a sweep with the set parameters 1407 0806 32 4 25 E 2 RF Signal RF R amp S SMB Instruments connected downstream can be taken into consideration when setting the frequency and level by entering a frequency and or level offset Automatic level control ensures maximum level accuracy User specific lists which contain level correction values for any frequency range User Correction can be created to for example compensate the cable attenuation in a test assembly setup The RF signal can be also generated in modulated form An internal LF generator internal pulse generator and or the external modulation inputs MOD EXT at the front and PULSE EXT at the back of the instrument are available as the source for the analog modulations An external trigger signal for the sweeps can be provided at the INST TRIG input The input REF IN is used to input an external instrument reference frequency and the output REF OUT serves as the output of the reference frequency internal or external RF Frequency The simplest way to set the RF frequency is to enter it directly in the header of the display eg oF O 1 000
237. ing system None of the commands except for RST and SYSTem PRESet influences the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Resetting the Status Reporting System Event Switching on supply voltage DCL SDC On Device Clear STATus PRESet CLS Pavel On Status Selected Device SYSTem PRESet Clear Clear EE EE ESCR Clear command processing and input buffer 1 Every command being the first in a command line i e immediately following a lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt clears the output buffer 1407 0806 32 5 28 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Remote Control Commands Contents Chapter 6 Remote Control Commands 1407 0806 32 6 Remote Control Commands sccceeeeeeeeeeeenseeenseeensesensesenneseaes 6 1 GOMIMand DESCHPION EE 6 1 Kei e ME 6 1 COMMON Commands EE 6 3 CALibration SUDSY SION EE 6 6 DIAGNOSTIC Subsystem ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeessaaeeeeeeess 6 8 DISPlay Gubsvsiem 6 10 FORMat Subsystem ccccccecccccesseceeeceesseceecceeeseceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeees 6 11 KBOard Subsystem 0ccccccccecsseeseeeeeeeeeeaaeesseceeeeeesseeesseeeeessuaaaeseeeeess 6 13 MMEMory Subsystem ccccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseseeeessaeaaeeseeeess 6 14 OUTPUt Gubevstem ccc cccccccceecceeceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeseaeauceeeseeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeas 6 20 SOURCE SUDSY DEE 6 23 SOURCE AM SUDSYSICIN EE 6 23 SOURCe CORRE
238. ing to 2 MHz The number of sweep steps for linear sweep spacing POINts is automatically set to 201 RST value Options Correlation SCPI 1 MHz The value of SWE POINts is Device specific adjusted automatically 1407 0806 32 6 80 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 9999 PCT The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated for STARt lt STOP using the following formula New frequency Old frequency STEP LOG x Old frequency STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency The frequency is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG is given in percent whereby the suffix PCT must always be used The command is linked to the command SWEep FREQuency POINts for STARt lt STOP as follows POINts log STOP log STARt log STEP LOG 1 If STEP LOG changes the value of POINTs Is adjusted The STARt and STOP value is retained Example FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 100 MHz FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz SWE SPAC LOG sets logarithmic sweep spacing SWE STEP LOG 1OPCT sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 of the previous frequency in each instance for a frequency sweep RST value Options Correlation SCPI 1 PCT 0 01 PCT The value of SWE POIN is adjusted automatically Device specific SOUR
239. inputs and outputs of the signal generator Unused inputs and outputs are not shown The lines indicate the signal flow Symbols and labels refer to the corresponding inputs and outputs on the front and rear panel of the signal generator The direction input or output is indicated by an arrow 1407 0812 62 3 E 2 Display R amp S SMB Example PULSE The symbols indicate the input for the external pulse signal on the instrument rear panel PULSE EXT a Menu Structure Display The parameters are set in the menus Menus are called either via the function blocks in the diagram or by means of the key The menus are displayed on top of the block diagram If the menu buttons assign menu specific functions to the softkeys the Winbar is hidden State Off FM Source Int e FM Mode Normal E ba E L FM Deviation 1 000 Int Ext FM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 1 0000 kHz LFGen Shape Sine This section describes the menu structure Menu operation is described in section Menu Operation page 3 17 the setting of parameters in section Setting Parameters page 3 10 The menus are in Windows format They differ in details depending on their function but they consist of the same main elements Frequency Modulation Menu header The header line contains the name of the menu e g Frequency Phase and the button for closing the menu The button can be operated with the mouse For operation from the front p
240. instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to Off Example ROSC SOUR INT selects the internal source ROSC ADJ ON activates use of a user defined adjustment value ROSC ADJ VAL 1400 sets the adjustment value to 1400 RST value Resolution Options SCPI SE Device specific SOURce ROSCillator INTernal ADJust VALue 0 4095 The command specifies the frequency correction value adjustment value Example ROSC ADJ VAL 1400 sets the adjustment value to 1400 RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1400 1 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 76 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal EXTernal The command selects between internal and external reference frequency Parameters INTernal The internal reference oscillator is used The reference signal is provided at the REF OUT connector EXTernal An external reference signal is used It must have a frequency of 10 MHz and must be input at the REF IN connector at the rear of the instrument Example ROSC SOUR EXT selects the external source 1407 0806 32 6 7 7 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce SWEep Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for checking the RF sweeps i e the sweeps of the RF generators Sweeps are always triggered except for the MANual sweep mode The frequency sweep is activated by the command SOURce FREQuency MODE SWEep and the level sweep
241. iod Example PULM DOUB STAT ON double pulse mode is enabled RST value Resolution Options SCPI gt T Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific SOURce PULM DOUBle WIDTh 20ns 1s The command sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation Example PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us sets a width of 33 us for the second pulse RST value Resolution Options SCPI Ams 20ns Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp S SMB K23 Device specific SOURce PULM PERiod 5us 85 s 100ns 85 s The command sets the period of the generated pulse The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal Example PULM PER 220 us the pulse period is 220 us RST value Resolution Options SCPI 1 ms ius 20ns Option R amp S SMB K22 and R amp SSMB K23 Device specific SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted The command sets the polarity between modulating and modulated signal This command is only effective for an external modulation signal Parameters NORMal The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause INVerted The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse Example PULM SOUR EXT selects the external modulation source PULM POL INV selects inverted polarity RST value Resolution Options SCPI NORMal Option R amp S SMB K22 Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 73 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce PULM SOURce NTernal EXTernal The comma
242. iod of time Wait Time The screen saver prolongs the life time of the display lamp This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is exclusively operated via remote control Remote control command DISP PSAV STAT ON meal UA Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries are made Remote control command DISP PSAV HOLD 10 1407 0806 32 4 15 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB EE Selects the keyboard layout for the selected keyboard language The assignment of some keys depends on the selected layout and language Remote control command KBO LAY US Language Selects the keyboard language The assignment of some keys depends on the selected language Remote control commanad KBO LANG US Remote Channel Settings Setup Remote The Remote GPIB Ethernet menu provides access to the GPIB and Ethernet settings The Remote GPIB menu is opened using the or key under Remote PIB Settings IPIB channel address 28 Ethernet Settings Visa Resource String TOPIP 10 111 15 217 INSTR GPIB channel address Sets the IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument Remote control command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 28 Visa Resource String Indicates the visa resource string This string is used for remote control of the instrument A separate string is provided for remote control via the LAN and the USB interface Remote control commands
243. ion Parameter field editing mode The editing mode is terminated and the previous value is restored exception value variations with the rotary knob cannot be cancelled Menu area The cursor is set to another menu area Menu The menu is closed and the cursor changes to the next higher control level Frequency level field The cursor is set on the previously active menu or if no menu was active on the first function block in the diagram 1407 0812 62 3 10 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Setting Parameters Function block in the diagram The cursor is set on the first menu in the Winbar If no menus are open the current cursor position remains unchanged Edits the frequency or level Press FREQ or LEVEL Press CTRL F frequency Click the entry field and enter in the entry fields of the key or CTRL L level value header area Enter value Enter value Activates the block Press DIAGRAM DIAGRAM key Press CTRL D Click the function block diagram Activates the Winbar Press softkey Press CTRL F1 Click button in Winbar Press WINBAR key Press CTRL W Calls the Setup or File Press SETUP FILE or Press CTRL S Setup menu or the menu tree MENU key CTRL F File or CTRL M menu tree Selecting a Control Element Setting Parameters Control elements are always sel
244. ion STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates level correction Level correction is performed using the table which has been selected with the command CORRection CSET SELect Example SOURSCORRICSET tee selects the table ucor1 SOUR CORR ON activates user correction RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF HE Device specific SOURce CORRection VALue The command requests the current value for user correction This command is a query command and has no RST value Example CORR VAL queries the value currently used for level correction Response 3 the correction value is 3dB RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 32 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce FM Subsystem The FM subsystem contains the commands for checking the frequency modulation The FM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce FM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem e g frequency The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Internal and external modulation source can be selected at the same time thus enabling two tone FM modulation The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted ES RRE ETC EC enssp eeter Loes Jl gscpu terdefteg acing ll gecEu terd teter orzaom Je o PisoURcesFMMODE NORMal LNOwe H
245. ion if internal source is selected as the AM modulation source i e Int is selected as Source The LF Sweep mode is activated in the LF Sweep menu RF frequency and level sweeps are activated in the respective menus of the RF block Option Pulse Generator R amp S SMB K23 enables the generation of single and double pulse signals The generator is activated and configured in the Pulse Generator menu of the LF output block or in the Pulse Modulation menu of the Mod block Pulse Generator is selected as Source LF Frequency Sweep Menu The LF Frequency Sweep menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the key under LF Gen LF Output Pulse Gen In the top section the LF Sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected The buttons are used to reset the LF sweep all sweep modes or to execute the LF sweep Single mode Mode Auto Reset Sweep Start Freq 1 000 0 kHz Stop Freq 50 000 0 kHz e Current Freq 5 000 0 kHz Spacing Linear Step Lin 1 000 0 kHz Dwell Time 10 0 ms The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section 1407 0806 32 4 6 E 2 R amp S SMB State LF Sweep Mode LF Sweep 1407 0806 32 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block Activates LF Sweep mode Note Activating the LF sweep automatically deactivates the RF frequency sweep and level sweep Remote control commands SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE SOUR LFO F
246. ion of options and the firmware update are described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument on the CD ROM Unpacking the Instrument gt Remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory lists for the separate items gt Check the instrument for damage gt If there is damage immediately contact the carrier who delivered the instrument In this case make sure not to discard the box and packing material gt The original packaging is also useful for transporting or shipping the signal generator later on Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19 Rack The instrument is designed for indoors use It can either be set up independently or mounted in a 19 rack A rack adapter refer to data sheet for Order No is required for installation in a 19 rack The mounting instructions are supplied with the adapter ATTENTION Risk of overheating To less airflow for cooling may cause overheating of the instrument Prior to putting the instrument into operation always check for space between the ventilation holes and the rack casing to get sufficient air supply in the rack 1407 0812 62 1 12 E 2 R amp S SMB Putting into Operation Safety Instructions General Precautions ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by disregarding the following precautions Any non compliance with the following precautions may cause damag
247. ions SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 16 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt lt binary block data gt MMEMory DATA lt file_ name gt This command writes the block data lt binary block data gt to the file identified by lt file name gt The IEC IEEE bus terminator should be set to EOI in order to ensure correct data transfer The associated query command transfers the specified file from the R amp S Signal Generator to the IEC IEEE bus and then on to the control computer It is important to ensure that the intermediate memory on the control computer is large enough to take the file In this case the setting for the IEC IEEE bus terminator is irrelevant This command can be used to read transfer stored instrument settings directly from to the instrument The binary data block has the following structure 234 lt block_data gt always comes first in the binary block lt number gt indicates how many digits the subsequent length entry has 2 in example lt number gt indicates the number of subsequent bytes 34 in example lt binary block data gt binary block data for the specified length Example MMEM DATA TEST1 savrcl 3767 lt binary data gt writes the block data to the file testl savrcl MMEM DATA TEST1 SAVRCL sends the data of the file Test1 savrcl from the R amp S Signal Generator to the control computer in the form of a binary block RST value Resolution Options SCPI
248. is part of the visa resource string used by the programs for identification and control of the instrument The visa resource string has the form TCPIP ipaddr inst0 INSTR ipaddr has to be replaced by the IP address or the computer name of the instrument For instance if the instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 TCPIP 192 1 2 3 inst0 INSTR is the valid resource name Specification of instO in the resource name is optional In this example also TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR is therefore a valid resource name A resource name with computer name could be TCPIP RSSM1 INSTR for instance TCPIP designates the network protocol used and INSTR indicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used If several instruments are connected to the network each instrument has its own IP address and associated resource name The controller identifies these instruments by means of the resource name In the example below the program Measurement amp Automation Explorer from National Instruments is used for setting up an Ethernet remote control link Link setup with this program is easy and first tests can be performed The R amp S Signal Generator is preconfigured for networks using DHCP dynamic host configuration protocol If this configuration is used the computer name must be entered at the position of the IP address It is also possible to assign a fixed IP address to the instrument Setting up Control of the Signal Generator in the Measurement amp Aut
249. is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR DEXC SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example CORR DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into user correction lists CORR DEXCSAFIL SEL Tvar rs c en ucor import ucor csv selects that ASCII file ucor csv is imported CORR DEXCTSEL var rs gen ucor inport ucor amp selects that the ASCII file ucor csv is imported into user correction list ucor_imp Yi pci 1407 0806 32 6 31 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce CORRection CSET SELect lt table name gt The command selects the table for user correction Level correction must also be activated with the command SOURce lt 1 2 gt CORRection CSET STATe ON The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions uco in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR CORR CSET SEL in which case the files in the specified directory are selected The command is an event and therefore has no RST value Example CORRSCSET vwan lists ucor ucorl selects the table ucorl CORR ON activates level correction Correction is performed using the table ucorl RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific SOURce CORRect
250. is displayed see section File Manager page 3 23 The complete instrument settings are saved and loaded in the File menu which is called up by means of the key see chapter 4 section Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key File Select Menu The File Select menu consists of several areas Select Operation save Select Operation recent data sets recent data sets po ivar smb Exclude Frequency Exclude Level l Recall teria beer 1 File Saye P File imm Imm anager Save Imm 1 imm 2 Manager In the upper area Recent Data Sets the files last used are listed a maximum of ten files is displayed The available drives and directories are displayed on the left side the files of the selected directory on the right side The currently selected path is displayed above the windows Only the relevant files without file extensions are displayed If the area is opened several times the path last selected is displayed When a file is saved or created its name is user selectable the extension is assigned automatically and cannot be entered The file is saved to the selected path Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas see section Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters page 3 12 By using the rotary knob or cursor keys the area is marked the entry focus is shifted to this area by clicking the rotary knob or using the Enter key The rotary knob and the up down c
251. is terminated by clicking the rotary knob Enter or with the key the unit displayed in the entry field next to the value is assigned in the example ksym s etme ae Zi yields pee EC 1407 0812 62 3 14 E 2 R amp S SMB Setting Parameters Assigns a unit To terminate the entry press To terminate the entry press one of the Select unit in the field at the one of the unit keys key combinations ALT F9 F10 right of the value before or F11 F12 entering the value for list select unit in the field at the or selection see next section right of the value for list select unit in the field at the right of the selection see next section value for list selection see next section Changes a unit After the value entry has been After the value entry has been terminated Select unit in the field at the terminated press a lunit key press one of the key combinations right of the value after the or ALT F9 F10 F11 F12 value entry for list selection select unit in the field at the or see next section right of the value for list select unit in the field at the right of the selection see next section value for list selection see next section Selecting a Value from a List Setting Parameters The KM button next to the value field indicates that a selection list is available Clicking the rotary knob Enter opens the list Selection is made by choosing an entry item is highlighted and confirmation with
252. ister which permits a check of the device status A decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 1 is returned The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status changes of the R amp S Signal Generator causes the status registers to be changed A decimal value between 0 and 32767 2 15 1 is set goe eme Ea heal een E en EECHER CES Stesel Leer EECHER CES STATUsOPERationPTRansiion Jelli STATus QUEStionable CONDition PL Query only STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 32767 NEE NEE STATus QUEStionable EVENt PF Query only PSTATus GUESionableNTRansiton s PSTATus GUESionablePTRansiton d o gaven II Psrarusqueueinem SS yy STATus OPERation EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the STATus OPERation EVENt register RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus OPERation register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status Example STAT OPER COND queries the Status Operation Condition register RST va
253. ivity is precisely 1RAD V RST value Resolution Options SCPI S Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 64 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce PM SOURce EXT INT INT EXT The command selects the modulation source for phase modulation INT is the internal modulation source which is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external analog signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Internal and external modulation source can be selected at the same time Example PM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source Options SCPI Compliant SOURce PM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates phase modulation Activation of phase modulation deactivates frequency modulation Example PM STAT ON activates PM modulation RST value Resolution Options Correlation OFF PM STATe ON deactivates SCPI Compliant frequency modulation 1407 0806 32 6 65 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce POWer Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level level control and level correction of the RF signal Other units can also be used instead of dBm by entering the unit directly after the numerical value example POW 0 5v by changing the DEFault unit in the UNIT system see the command UNIT POWER The keyword SOURGe is optional with commands and can be omitted vemmens TT Dt Reman mo e ogeb eH Eng ll lees ogecb enterd Logan II BESCH
254. l offset is entered the level entered with POWer no longer corresponds to the RF output level The following correlation applies POWer RF output level POWer OFFSet Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level but rather the query value of POWer Only dB is permitted as the unit here The linear units V W etc are not permitted The keywords of this command are largely optional Therefore both the long and short form of the command are shown in the example Example SOURCS POWEr LEVeLsIMMediate OFFsert 1L0 or POW OFFS 10 sets the RF level offset to 10 dB RST value Resolution Options SCPI odad foad o Compliant SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate RCL INCLude EXCLude The command determines whether the current level is retained or whether the stored level setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded RST does not affect this setting Parameters INCLude The stored level is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded EXCLude The RF level is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded The current level is retained Example POW RCL INCL the stored level is set if the Recall command is called RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1407 0806 32 6 68 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURc
255. l only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the key again shifts the entry focus up one level The buttons softkeys can be selected and activated e Shift file Mark file and then press the Cut button softkey Mark the directory to which the file is to be shifted and then click the Paste button softkey If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file e Copy file Mark file and then press the Copy button softkey Mark the directory to which the file is to be copied and then click the Paste button softkey If the target directory already contains a file with the same name a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file 1407 0812 62 3 23 E 2 Remote Access R amp S SMB e Rename file Mark file and then press the Rename button softkey An entry window for entering the new file name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key If a file with the same name already exists a confirmation query is displayed to confirm overwriting of this file e Delete file Mark file and then press the Delete button softkey Prior to deletion a confirmation query is displayed which the user must confirm for this file to be deleted e Create new directory Mark drive or directory level where the new directory is to be created and then press the Create New Directory button softkey An entry window f
256. lation In addition the RF signal can be modulated with internal modulations waveforms e g sine waves and rectangular signals Amplitude frequency and phase modulation are available for the basic unit R amp S SMB frequency option R amp S SMB B10x without additional equipment options A standard LF generator is provided for internal modulation Pulse modulation and a pulse generator are provided by options R amp S SMB K22 Pulse Modulator and R amp S SMB K23 Pulse Generator respectively Settings for the modulation are made in separate modulation menus These menus can be accessed in the block diagram by way of the MOD function block or by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the key Iv The key switches the active modulations on and off Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch off MOD OFF is displayed in the info line of the header next to the Level field Remote control command SOUR MOD ALL STAT OFF Mod Gen Modulation RF Mod Gen RF config contig contig config config 3 VW On T On On The activated and deactivated state is indicated in the block diagram by means of the different block color and the status of the On checkbox The active modulations are indicated in the block Modulation Sources For amplitude pulse frequency and phase modulation the internal and external modulation source can be used Internal M
257. le menu provides options for loading complete instrument settings Here it is possible to select whether the current or stored RF frequency and RF level settings are to be used File Select Operation recent data sets Recent data sets File Displays the files last used The entire path is shown lf the desired file is in the list it can be selected in this window Remote control command n a Directory File l Enter the directory in which the file with the instrument setting to be loaded is located The Selected file window lists all the files in this directory Remote control command MMEM CDIR var user ple Risto ile Selects the file with the desired instrument configuration Remote control command MMEM CAT 1407 0806 32 4 21 E 2 Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key R amp S SMB Exclude Frequency File The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote control command SOUR FREQ RCL EXCL Exclude Level File The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded Remote control command SOUR POW RCL EXCL EES Loads the selected configuration If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the ins
258. le mode the current sweep is stopped The Single sweep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR SING SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ EXEC Sets a step by step sweep cycle If this mode is activated the cursor moves to the value displayed for Current Freq Any variation to the Current Freq value triggers a sweep step The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log lf a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Step sweep starts at the current RF frequency The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE MAN SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN D DEA SOUR FREQ MAN 1E6 the value entered with command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN LOG sets the step width The value entered with command SOUR FREQ MAN has no effect the command only triggers the next sweep step However the value has to be in the currently set sweep range start to stop In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single s
259. list mode files are stored with the fixed file extensions Isw in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST DEXC SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists LIST DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen listmode import list csv selects that ASCII file list csv is imported LIST DEXC SEL var rs_gen listmode import list_imp selects that the ASCII file list csv is imported into list mode list list_imp Yi pec SOURce LIST DWELI ms Is The command sets the time for which the instrument retains a setting Example LIST DWEL 15 each setting in the list is retained for 15 ms RST value Resolution Options SCPI 10 ms Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 55 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LIST FREQuency 300 kHz RFmax 300 kKHZ RFmax block data The command fills the FREQuency part of the selected list with data The data can be given either as a list of numbers list can be of any length and list entries must be separated by commas or as binary block data When block data is transferred 8 4 bytes are always interpreted as a floating point number with double accuracy see the command FORMat DATA RST doe
260. ll Time List Mode 4 57 6 55 Dwell Time RF Zween 4 49 6 79 E Edit User Correction Data 4 40 EFC Electronic Frequency Control 4 30 EFC mode Electronic Frequency Control 4 67 EMP Level EE 4 36 Enable diSable been 6 88 EMN Sr EE 1 5 ENUY EIT aa R N 3 8 EO COMMANGAING EE 5 13 Error Messages 11cccccseeccnecnsesseceausssessaueeeeeseuss 3 5 9 3 9 4 Error messages display let 6 97 Eror EIER 5 27 Error queue Ouenm 6 87 6 94 6 95 ESE event status enable register ccccsseecsneeeeeees 5 25 Ethene eege 1 19 Ethernet Remote Control 5 4 Event status enable register ESEB 0000n0000nn00ann0aaane 5 25 Example fOr setting cccccccccceeeccsescccecseccsesessnseessens 2 4 2 8 Exclude Frequency 1 ccssccnsssensscccssccsnscnsnsensssens 4 22 6 37 ele GT 4 22 6 68 Execute Single List Mode 0 aann0nnnaaneannaanna 4 57 6 59 Execute Single Sweep Frequency Sweep 4 47 6 79 Execute Single Sweep Level Sween 4 53 6 81 Execute Single Sweep LF ween 4 79 6 45 Expiration date Of option cccccccccecccseeecsessseessaeeeseeessees 4 7 Leger 5 15 Exponent too large 7723 9 5 EXT REF e ee ie orn eee TS Te er me 9 2 Extension Import Export List Mode data 4 59 6 52 6 53 Extension Imp Exp User Corr data 4 42 6 28 6 29 External digital modulation signal FM ccccccceeeee 4 65 External Impedance Pulse Modulaton 4 75 External Input Impeda
261. llowed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Character data too long 144 The character data element contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Command Error 100 Generic error message that cannot detect a more specific error SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Command protected 203 The desired command could not be executed as it was protected with a password Example The command CAL FREQ might be protected with a password Remedy Use command SYST PROT1 OFF 123456 to enable the command SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 4 E 2 R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Data out of range 222 A value of the transmitted command was outside the legal range Example Command SOUR FREQ only permits entries in the range of min to max frequency SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Data type error 104 The command contains an invalid value indication Example ON is indicated instead of a numeric value for frequency setting FREQ ON is not allowed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Device specific error 300 Device specific error not defined in greater detail SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Exponent too large 123 The magnitude of the exponent is too large SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR r
262. lock or using the key under RF S DE Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Level Sweep The combined menu ALC UCOR provides access to function User Correction in the lower section The menu is used to activate deactivate user correction and to create select and activate the correction data lists User Correction Settings User Cor Data Edit User Cor Data Import Export gt gt gt The upper sections provide access to the automatic level control settings see section Automatic Level Control ALC page 4 37 1407 0806 32 4 39 E 2 User Correction State User Correction Value User Correction User Correction Data User Correction Edit User Correction Data User Correction 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Activates deactivates user correction The UCOR status message appears in the frequency and level display Remote control command SOUR CORR STAT ON Indicates the current value for level correction Remote control command SOUR CORR VAL Calls the File Select menu for selecting and creating a list or the File Manager Remote control command SOUR CORR CSET CAT Response Ucorl Ucorz SOUR SCORR CSELISEL Ucorl1 SOUR CORR CSET DEL Ucor2 Calls the editor for editing the selected user correction list A list consists of any number of frequency level value pairs T
263. logical name for the dewior that makes it eases bo idenhhy thie neliument You can use lhe skates m yout code when calling vi pen bo qeale a sasson bo bis devica Resource Name TCRAP 127 0 01 1N5TR Alax sM lt Back Next gt Frist Cancel 4 gt Press Next and then the Finish button The instrument is now registered in the program and can be addressed via the resource or alias name 1407 0806 32 5 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Switchover to Remote Control CE OO Measurement amp Ww Automation Explorer M is ready to create your device Click Finish to create your device Click Back to review device information in the previous pages Click Cancel to leave this wizard without creating your device Finish Cancel J Starting the Measurement amp Automation program for remote control of the Signal Generator gt Start program on the controller gt Inthe Configuration window open Instruments and Interfaces and select R amp S SM Alias under VISA Ethernet Devices gt Open the menu by clicking Open VISA Session with the right mouse key File Edit View Tools Help G amp Properties 4open VISA Session DN Devices and Interfaces VISA Resource Mame TCPIP 89 1 2 118 JNSTR VISA resource identifier for this device LS We Ge iy eet VISA Alias SATE Unique YISA alias to access this device Si A VISA Ethernet Devices Static Device 1 Tells whether this device was statica A
264. lue Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 84 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description STATus OPERation PTRansition The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from O to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register A new event in the hardware is thus registered e g the start of an adjustment Example STATVOPER PIR 3276 all transitions from O to 1 in the condition part of the Status Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation NTRansition The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus OPERation register If a bit is set a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in the EVENt part of the register The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus registered e g the end of an adjustment Example STAT OPER NTR O a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status Operation register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus OPERation ENABle The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus OPERation register This setting determines which events of the Status Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in the status byte These events can be used for a service request Exam
265. ly starts an RF frequency sweep cycle The command is only effective for sweep mode Single SOURce SWEep FREQuency MODE AUTO in combination with TRIG FSW SOUR SING The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example SWE FREQ MODE AUTO sets the triggered sweep mode i e a trigger is required to start the sweep TRIG FSW SOUR SING sets the Single trigger mode i e a trigger starts a single sweep TRIG FSW starts a single RF frequency sweep Device specific RST value Resolution Options SCPI TRIGger FSWeep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe EXTernal BUS EAUTo The command sets the trigger source for the RF frequency sweep The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command SWEep FREQ MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started 1407 0806 32 6 100 E 2 R amp S SMB Command D
266. m for the next setting in the Step sweep mode POW MODE SWE sets the Level Sweep mode POW MAN 5 5 dBm triggers the next sweep step with a level of 5 5 dBm Options 1407 0806 32 6 69 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce POWer MODE CW FIXed SWEep LIST The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output level Parameters CW FlXed The instrument operates at a constant level CW and FlXed are synonyms The output level is set with SOURce POWer SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The level is set using the commands SOURce POWer STARt STOP MANual Example POW MODE SWEep sets the SWEep mode The settings under SOURce POW STARt STOP MANual become effective RST value Resolution Options Correlation SCPI CW POW MODE LIST sets Compliant FREQ MODE LIST SOURce POWer STARt Minimum level Maximum level The command sets the RF start level in Sweep mode As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer OFFSet is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level OFFSet Maximum level OFFSet Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model T
267. mand SOUR FREQ SPAN 400MHz Displays the current frequency If Step is set the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR FREQ MAN 300MHz Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Remote control command SOURTSSWE FREOZSPAC LIN LOG Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes Step Lin or Step Log is displayed depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step Lin With the linear sweep the step width is a fixed frequency value which is added to the current frequency The linear step width is entered in Hz Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1 MHz 4 48 E 2 R amp S SMB Dwell Time RF Frequency Sweep Ext Trigger Input Slope RF Frequency Sweep 1407 0806 32 Sweep Mode Step Log With the logarithmic sweep the step width is a constant fraction of the current frequency This fraction is added to the current frequency The logarithmic step width is entered in Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ STEP LOG 1 PCT Sets the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps Note It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ DWEL 1Oms Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger This setting affect
268. me value Query by Means of Commands Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries The individual commands are listed in the description of the STATus Subsystem The returned value is always a number that represents the bit pattern of the register queried This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Query Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked at in the ERROR menu via manual control or queried via the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet using command SvySTem ERRor Each call of SYSTem ERRor provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well 1407 0806 32 5 27 E 2 Status Reporting System R amp S SMB Reset Values of the Status Reporting Systems Commands RST DCL and SySTem PRESet and switching on the supply voltage also affect the status report
269. ment of IP address DHCP in order to use this function Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE AUTO Static The IP address is assigned manually Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE STAT Peer to Peer A Peer to Peer connection is used Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD MODE P2P Only for Static and Peer to Peer mode Enters the IP address manually The new entry is only accepted and the IP address changed after the Accept button is pressed In case of manual input of IP address we recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD 7 8 9 10 Only for Static and Peer to Peer mode Enters the Subnet mask This number is used together with the IP address to identify the network segment the instrument is in The new entry is only accepted and the subnet mask changed after the Accept button is pressed We recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote control command SYST COMM NETW IPAD SUBN MASK 255 255 255 0 Only for Static mode Enters the IP address of the default gateway The new entry is only accepted and the default gateway changed after the Accept button is pressed This address identifies the router on the same n
270. mmercial off the shelf COTS software may impair the instrument function For this reason we recommend that you only execute programs tested by Rohde amp Schwarz with regard to their compatibility with the instrument software The drivers and programs used in the instrument under Linux have been adapted to the test instrument Existing instrument software must only be modified with update software released by Rohde amp Schwarz The signal generator is equipped with the Linux operating system please note statement at the back of the title page The configuration of the operating system is optimally adapted to signal generator functions in the factory Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like keyboard are installed or in the event that the network configuration does not comply with the default settings see sections Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN After power up of the signal generator the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automatically The operating system cannot be accessed All necessary system settings can be made in the Environment section of the Setup menu The R amp S SMB provides an internal flash memory it does not contain a disk drive The CompactFlash Card holds the firmware and the stored data However data transfer is only possible via a memory stick connected to a USB interface The memory stick and the flash memory are accessed via the File Manager
271. mpliant 1407 0806 32 6 40 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce INPut Subsystem The SOURce INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for external pulse modulation signals The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps Instrument Trigger vemmens TT SI SOURce INPut PULM IMPedance G50 1G0 SOURCce INPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative SOURce INPut PULM IMPedance G10 1G0 The commands set the impedance for external feed via the PULSE EXT input Parameters 1G0 10 kohm to ground G50 50 ohm to ground Example INP PULM IMP G50 the PULSE EXT input is set to 50 ohm to ground RST value Resolution i SCPI 1G0 Device specific SOURce JINPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command sets the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal at the INST TRIG inputs BNC connector at the rear of the instrument The setting is effective for both inputs at the same time Example INP TRIG SLOP NEG the active slope of the external trigger signal at the INST TRIG inputs is the falling slope RST value Resolution Options SCPI Le Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 41 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LFOutput Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and Sweep mode as well as for analog modulations An LF sweep is set in several steps which are shown in the following example 1 Set t
272. mplitude Modulation s AM EE 4 62 Amplitude Modulation OR EE 4 62 Frequency Wodulation FM EE 4 65 Frequency Modulation Men 4 65 Phase Modulation ME 4 68 Phase Modulation Me nUsisissrsnssid e daa e aa aeaa aai 4 69 Paulse lee RTE 4 72 Pulse Modulator Men EE 4 72 LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block 4 76 LF Frequency Sweep CIE 4 76 EFODO CME MU EE 4 81 PUSS Generator MENU E 4 82 1407 0806 32 LA 7 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings 4 Instrument Functions This chapter explains the functions of the signal generator and the options available in the setting menus The associated IEC IEEE bus command is specified for each parameter where applicable The description begins with the general instrument settings which do not directly affect signal generation The majority of these settings can be accessed by means of front panel key menus and not by means of function block menus The signal generation functions are then described beginning with the functions which affect the RF signal RF block and the analog modulations Mod block The configuration of the modulation generators LF generators and pulse generator and of the LF sweep is offered in the Mod Gen block The general instrument settings include various functions such as e Setting a defined basic setup using the key section Default Instrument Settings Preset Key page 4 2 e Switching from remote control to manual control using the key section Switchin
273. nce Dulse 4 73 6 41 External Input Impedance Pulse Trgger 6 74 External modulation Signal AM ssaasssananneennnnnnennenenn 4 62 External modulation signal EM 4 65 6 35 External modulation signal HM 4 68 6 65 External modulation Signal Pulse ccsceceseeeeeeeees 6 74 External modulation Signal voltage c ccccseeereeeees 4 62 External Reference Frequency asaaan0aanreaannne 4 31 6 76 External tuning Reference Ireoguenck 4 30 E 2 R amp S SMB F File contains invalid data 2en 9 12 PHO EE 4 21 6 15 FETED tere 4 19 File ee EE 4 23 Filename MISSING 267 9 12 Fine adjustment Reference frequency 4 31 6 76 Firmware update EE 1 12 Firmware VEISION EE 4 7 6 3 FVD CVIQUON EE 4 67 6 33 6 34 FM External Couplmg 4 68 6 33 FMF ICOQUCICY eege et 4 68 6 43 FM MOO EE 4 66 6 34 e 4 67 6 34 FIVE Eeer 4 68 6 44 eeler 4 66 6 35 e 4 66 6 35 FM PhiM Modulator adjustment aaaaaaanaaaanaanneaannnaenne 6 6 FEM DG ee EE 4 30 4 68 6 2 Eegen 9 1 Frequency AM oases tecnica bade tase natu een sedan tances 4 64 6 43 FICQUCNCY FM as E 4 68 6 43 Frequency LF generator 4 82 6 43 Frequency List mode EEN 4 58 6 56 FICGQUCNICY FRIM EE 4 71 6 43 Fregene Ve F M EE 4 74 6 73 Frequency RF output Signal 4 26 6 37 Frequency RF Zween 4 48 6 39 Fregene OS eegend 3 4 ee 4 27 6 39 Front panel key emulation 0 cccccccceceseeeneeeeeeseeeeeees 3 26
274. nd selects the source for pulse modulation Pulse Parameters INTernal The internally generated rectangular signal is used for the pulse modulation EXTernal The signal applied externally via the PULS EXT connector is used for the pulse modulation Example PULM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source PULM STAT ON activates the pulse modulation RST value Resolution Options INTernal Option R amp S SMB K22 external pulse modulation and R amp S SMB K23 internal pulse modulation Compliant SOURce PULM STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates the pulse modulation The pulse generator and the output of the video sync signal is activated automatically Output of signal can be switched off with command SOURce PGEN OUTPut STATe OFF Example PULM STAT ON activates pulse modulation with the modulation source selected under sOURce PULM SOURCe RST value Resolution Options SCPI OFF Option R amp S SMB K22 Compliant SOURce PULM TRIGger EXTernal IMPedance G50 G10K The command selects the impedance for external pulse trigger The trigger is fed via the PULSE EXT input Example SOUR PULM TRIG EXT IMP G50 selects 50 OHM as the trigger impedance for the external pulse trigger RST value Resolution Options SCPI G10K Option R amp S SMB K22 Compliant SOURce PULM TRiGger EXTernal SLOPe POSitive NEGative The command sets the polarity of the active slope of
275. nd sets the time for the instrument internal clock Example SYST TIME 120 0 sets the time to precisely 12 pm RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SYSTem VERSion The command queries the SCPI version with which the instrument complies The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example SYST VERS queries the SCPI version Response 1996 the instrument complies with the version from 1996 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 97 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB TEST Subsystem The TEST system contains the commands for performing the routines as well as for direct manipulation of the hardware assemblies TEST DIRect The self tests return a 0 if the test is performed successfully otherwise a value other than 0 is returned None of the commands of this system have an RST value Caution The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the TEST DIRect command any safety mechanisms are bypassed The command is used for servicing purposes and should not be applied by the user Improper use could destroy the assembly vemmens TT i TEST DIRect assembly subaddress hex data string i TEST DIRect assembly subaddress hex data string The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command any safety mechanisms are bypassed This function is only available via remote control Example TESTIDIR
276. ndicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value Oort lt numeric_value gt lt num gt These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are permitted MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value MAXimum_ This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value UP This keyword increments the parameter value DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by adding the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SOURce FREQuency MAXimum eturns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block 1407 0806 32 6 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description Common Commands The common commands are taken from the standard IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 Identical commands have an identical effect in different instruments The headers of these commands consist of an asterisk followed by three letters Many common comma
277. nds affect the status reporting system which is described in detail in Chapter 5 commend Paramor oonan roren K a E T T ee lie ese OO EE O seeen ug ey ony E A L emeteraerneneh E e ET Ke A T T een A E ciation T EE REECH ER OO orons OOOO EE REES EHS OO E EE EE Ge EE pe id gern uty past Od iY Set anergy ony Pwa Wit coin gury U CLS CLEAR STATUS sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and OPERation register to zero The command does not change the enable and transition parts of the registers It deletes the output buffer ESE 0 255 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the event status enable register to the specified value The ESE query command returns the content of the event status enable register in decimal form ESR STANDARD EVENT STATUS QUERY returns the content of the event status register in decimal form 0 255 and then sets the register to zero IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY queries the instrument identification The instrument type serial number and firmware version are returned Example Rohde amp Schwarz SMB100A 1406 6000k02 100070 2 02 136 Release 1407 0806 32 6 3 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB IST INDIVIDUAL STATUS QUERY returns the content of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll OPC OPERATION COMPLETE sets bit 0 in the event status register when
278. nerator isavailable as the internal source Two tone AM is possible by simultaneously switching on the external and internal source The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the front of the instrument The coupling mode of the input AC or DC can be selected Amplitude Modulation Menu The Amplitude Modulation menu is opened in the Mod function block or using the key under Mod Modulation Frequency Mod Phase Mod Pulse Mod In the upper section of the menu the modulation source is selected and the modulation switched on The modulation source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation source 1407 0806 32 4 62 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Int Ext 300 30 0 S per Volt Mod Ext Coupling AC hi AM Source INTernal LFGen Freq 16 000 0 kHz LFGen Shape Sine State AM Amplitude Modulation AM Activates deactivates AM modulation Remote control command SOUR AM STAT ON AM Source AM Selects the source for the AM signal The source can be selecte
279. ns Install SW Option Test Point Check Front Panel j Environment Security Date Time Network Settings Display Settings Keyboard Settings Remote GPIB H Ethernet Protection Protection x Settings Save Recall 1407 0806 32 4 3 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB Internal Adjustments Setup System The R amp S SMB Signal Generator is extremely accurate thanks to the integrated procedures for adjustments Adjust All Adjust Synthesis Level Adjust Level Use ext Level Correction Data On All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed can be started in the Internal Adjustments menu The adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Adjustment is recommended if the temperature range in which the instrument is operated changes or prior to all applications which require maximum level and frequency accuracy During adjustment a bar indicates the status of progress If an error occurs adjustment is terminated and an error message Is output in the info line ATTENTION Risk of invalid adjustment In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument make sure that the instrument is warm before performing adjustments The warm up time is 30 minutes The Internal Adjustments menu is opened up usin
280. ns are described in detail in Chapter 4 nstrument Functions basics of remote control of the instrument in Chapter 5 Remote Control Basics and commands for remote control in chapter 6 Remote Control Commands Chapter 9 Error Messages contains a list of possible status and error messages Legend for Front Panel View This section gives an overview of control elements and connectors on the front panel of the R amp S SMB Each element connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed information Freq 1 543000000 GHz X Level 13 dBm D 7 Gn ES du LE MOD PULSE far en ation Configure igure H 2 TOGGI mV LJ SPACE dBm Figure 1 1 Front panel view 1407 0812 62 1 1 E 2 Legend for Front Panel View R amp S SMB 1 Keys for general instrument settings PRESET See chapter 4 section ES Sets the instrument to a defined state General Instrument A d HELP Settings Displays context sensitive help text A LOCAL Switches from REMOTE control to LOCAL manual control SETUP Opens the setup menu for configuring general instrument settings FILE Activates the menu for storing or loading files INFO Displays status messages error messages and warnings 2 Display Freq Level iy 1 000 000 0000 GHz 30 00 dBm Display The display clearly shows all main settings and See chapter 3 section signal generator states
281. ns are required after the first run through a list The current dwell times will definitely no longer deviate from the set dwell times The list is processed from the beginning to the end of the list modes Auto External Single External Step List Mode menu The List Mode menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep Heo Level Sweep List Mode 1407 0806 32 4 54 E 2 R amp S SMB List Mode The menu is used to activate deactivate operating mode List to create select and activate the lists and to select the trigger mode and the dwell time State Mode Auto Reset Dwell Time Current Index Blank RF Output Default ON jw On 10 000 ms sl 0 Learn List Mode Data list List Mode Data Edit List Mode Data List Range In 0 2 ImportExport gt gt gt State List Mode Mode List Mode 1407 0806 32 Activates deactivates the LIST mode The currently selected list is processed In case of a new or modified list the necessary hardware settings are automatically determined on activation of the list mode The data determined in this way is stored along with the list and is available whenever the list is used again This means that when activating the list mode the system checks whether any hardware settings are present If so the list is started immedia
282. nstrument to new address CALL IBPAD generator 18 Inform controller about new address Sending the first command starts remote control operation Return to manual operation is possible via the front panel or the IEC IEEE bus Manually gt Press the key Notes Before the transition command processing must be completed as otherwise transition to remote control is performed immediately The key can be disabled by the interface message amp LLO see Section JEC IEEE Bus Messages in order to prevent unintentional transition In this case transition to manual mode is only possible via the IEC IEEE bus The key can be enabled again by deactivating the REN line of the IEC IEEE bus see Section IEC IEEE Bus Messages Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBLOC generator Get instrument to manual operation 1407 0806 32 5 3 E 2 Switchover to Remote Control R amp S SMB Remote Control via LAN Interface For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network with TCP IP network protocol Connection of the Signal Generator to a network and the querying of a computer name is described in section Connection to the Network Software for instrument control and the VISA program library must be installed on the controller Instrument control is via the VXI 11 standard protocol Only the IP address or the computer name is required for link setup The IP address computer name
283. nt chapter 4 on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Test Point Setup Test The Test Point menu provides access to the test points available in the instrument When activated the voltage of the selected test point is measured and displayed A detailed description of the test points can be found in Chapter 3 of the Service Manual supplied with the instrument The Test Point menu is opened using the or key under System Select Test Point DIAG _SMB_BAB_P V Voltage 6 9154 1407 0806 32 4 7 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB Seele Activates the measurement of the voltage at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG1 MEAS POIN DIAG NO D I Response 2 eeleCh Teen orm Calls the submenu for selecting the test point The currently selected key is shown next to the key recent data sets DIAG_SMB_BAB_P5V DIAG_SMB_BAB_P3V3 DIAG SMB BAB PLV Seledt File Manager Remote control commands DIAG1 POIN CAT Command lists all test points DIAG1 POIN DIAG SMB BAB P7 V With remote control voltage measurement starts as soon as the test point is selected Voltage Test Point Displays the measured voltage measurement at the selected test point Remote control command DIAG1 MEAS POIN DIAG SMB BAB P7V Response 2 Check Front Panel Setup Test The Check Front Panel menu is used to check whether the front panel keys are working correctly The menu displays all the fro
284. nt panel keys arranged in the same way as on the front panel The respective function is executed by pressing the associated key Roll click Local Freq 1407 0806 32 4 8 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings Security Setup Environment The Security menu provides access to the passwords and mass storage security settings It is opened using the or key under Environment The menu is divided into the password sections and the security settings section In the password section the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are defined and changed In the security section the remote interfaces are enabled and disabled A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed change Security Password Old Password New Password Confirm Password og OOOO O Security Settings USB Device Enable Lan Connections Enable Security Password Accept ACCEPI Security Settings Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings accordingly Remote control command n a Pook mame Indicates the user name used for access to the operating system Linux Remote control commands n a SIC password wee Enters the currently used password Default is root Remote control commands n a now i dSswond eer Enters t
285. nterface function IEC IEEE bus noonnaonnnaannnannannnnnneennnne 8 3 IME EE 5 26 Invalid DIOCK data 9 6 Invalid Character 707 9 6 Invalid EEPROM data 203 cccccsseecseeeeenesesneeeesaes 9 13 Invalid filename extension 264 9 13 Invalid separator 7072 9 6 l valid SUT E EE 9 7 ee 1 20 6 92 IP AGOreSS SOUP DEE 4 13 6 91 IP Address Mode Zeftup 4 12 6 92 Ee Ee 6 4 K IOV AX EE 1 5 eege Ee te 1 2 4 19 KOFA E 1 5 e EE 1 2 4 18 Koye IN EE 1 2 IOV e ENEE 1 5 La ee E 1 2 4 17 5 8 IOV MAT eene e L3 Key MOD ON OFF eege T 1 8 Key PRESE E 1 2 1 17 4 2 EE Ee 4 3 Koy SB EE 1 2 E et 1 4 Key COMDINQUONS EE 3 25 IOV DONO EE 1 18 Keyboard Language Setup 4 16 6 13 Keyboard Layout Setup 4 16 6 13 L Eeer ee 1 19 5 4 8 5 ENEE 8 5 LAN Remote control eege ee eh 5 4 Language Keyboard Setup 4 16 6 13 Layout Keyboard Setup 4 16 6 13 Learn List Mode Data 4 57 6 57 LeVel EEN stenge een eegen 4 33 6 67 Level Step width 4 35 6 70 Level Uninterrupted setting 2 cccsccceeeeeeeeees 4 34 6 20 EE e 4 32 Level GOlUSUMOI EE 6 7 Level control 228s ices ege 4 37 6 66 Level OCIS DIG Y rents tactics ge de 3 4 Level GISDIAY E 4 36 ee dese Seege deg 4 34 6 69 EE Ate e ee 4 34 6 68 BEVEL OFFSE eet 9 2 Level Sweep E 4 50 6 70 Level user COMCCUION EE 4 39 6 25 EE ee Eege 9 2 LF Gen Freouencky ieri eaiaaaiias 4 64 6 43 LF Gern VONAOC eege he tek inte a 4 81 6
286. numeric key R amp S SMB File Mame File Mame Enters a new value Edits a value Varies a value Press an alphanumeric key Click the rotary knob Select the desired numeric digit with the rotary knob and mark it by clicking the button Change the number using the keypad Click the rotary knob Select the desired numeric digit with the rotary knob and mark it by clicking the button Vary the number using Press a letter key ora numeric key Press the Enter key Select the desired numeric digit using the left right arrow keys Enter new value using the keyboard Click the desired position to set the cursor Change the value using the keyboard Press the Enter key Select the desired numeric digit using the left right arrow keys Vary the number using the rotary knob the up down arrow keys Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters The entry of a numeric value can be terminated by pressing a unit key on the front panel selecting a unit in the selection field next to the value or by clicking the rotary knob Enter The unit is assigned in different ways Terminating the value entry by selecting a unit in the units field When the entry is terminated by selecting a unit in the units field next to the value the selected unit is assigned e g sym s for list selection see next section Pwel Time 10 080 ms e Dwell Time 0 010 090 s Terminating the value entry with Enter If an entry
287. odulation Sources A LF generatorand a pulse generator are available as internal modulation sources for a fully equipped instrument The LF generator supplies sinusoidal or rectangular signals see also the section LF Output Menu page 4 81 The optional pulse generator provides single and double pulse modulation with selectable pulse widths and periods 1407 0806 32 4 61 E 2 Amplitude Modulation AM R amp S SMB External Modulation Sources The modulation inputs MOD EXT and PULSE EXT at the rear of the instrument are provided as the external modulation source for amplitude pulse frequency and phase modulation The external modulation signal at the inputs must have a voltage of Vs 1 V Vo 0 707 V in order to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range The input voltage should not exceed 1 1 Vs otherwise modulation distortions might occur With external pulse modulation the switching point is max 2 4 V and the voltage at the input should not exceed 5 V The maximum modulation frequency is 10 MHz for frequency and phase modulation Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations or Other Operating Modes The table shows the os and operating modes which can be activated simultaneously or which deactivate each other Amplitude modulation AM shh b Pulse modulation R amp S SMB K22 oh be be Amplitude Modulation AM An internal and or external source can be selected for amplitude modulation A LF modulation ge
288. oes not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 ora positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue Command Error This bit is set if acommand which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue User Request This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key Le when the instrument is switched over to manual control Power On supply voltage on GG W W This bit is set on switching on the instrument 1407 0806 32 5 25 E 2 Status Reporting System R amp S SMB Application of the Status Reporting System In order to effectively use the status reporting system the information contained there must be transmitted to the controller and further processed There are several methods which are outlined in the following Service Request Under certain circumstances the inst
289. of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Device specific refer to functions depending on the features of the Commands instrument such as frequency setting A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI committee Device specific extensions following the SCPI rules are permitted by the standard Device are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can responses contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the Response instrument status cf Section Responses to Queries Messages and Service Request Structure and syntax of the device messages are described in the following Section SCPI Command Structure and Syntax The commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and parameter are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header Note The commands used in the following examples are not in every case implemented in the instrument Common Commands Common commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and one or more parameters if any RST Examples RESET resets the device sob 203 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable register ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register 1
290. of the instrument can be connected via the IEEE 488 interface connector using a shielded cable Interface Characteristics e 8 bit parallel data transfer e bi directional data transfer e three line handshake e high data transfer rate e up to 15 instruments can be connected e maximal length of the interconnecting cables 15 m single connection 2m e wired OR connection if several instruments are connected in parallel ATN IFC NRFD EOI D2 DO GND SRQ NDAC DAV D3 D1 N S d N A N iy KE GND 24 GND 22 GND 20 GND 18 Di D5 GND 23 GND 21 GND 19 REN D6 D4 Figure 8 1 Pin assignment of IEC IEEE Bus interface Bus Lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DO to D7 The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DO is the least significant bit D7 the most significant bit Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1407 0806 32 8 2 E 2 R amp S SMB Hardware Interfaces 2 Control bus with 5 lines IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN Attention active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable active LOW permits switchover to r
291. ognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition 1407 0806 32 5 18 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Instrument Model and Command Processing Command Recognition The command recognition analyses the data received from the input unit It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only a DCL is serviced with priority a GET Group Execute Trigger e g is only executed after the commands received before Each recognized command is immediately transmitted to the data set but not executed immediately The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them to the status reporting system The rest of a command line after a syntax error is analyzed further if possible and serviced After the syntax test the value range of the parameter is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter or a DCL it also requests the data set to perform the necessary instrument hardware settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is still being set overlapping execution Database and Instrument Hardware The expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument functi
292. olded out feet must not exceed 500 N weight of instrument and of equipment stacked on top e When the instrument with expanded feet the feet might collapse and fold in Do not shift the instrument with the feet out Cleaning the Outside and Storing What is necessary is essentially the cleaning of the instrument ATTENTION Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents such as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dust cloth EMC Safety Precautions To avoid electromagnetic interference only suitable double shielded signal and control cables must be used USB devices must keep within permissible EMI limits 1407 0812 62 1 14 E 2 R amp S SMB Putting into Operation Connecting the R amp S SMB to the AC Supply The R amp S SMB is automatically matched to the applied AC voltage see rear panel There is no need to set the voltage manually or change fuses The AC supply connector is at the rear of the unit see below Switching On gt Connect the signal generator to the AC supply by means of the Supplied power cable Since the instrument is a protection class Equipment it should only be connected to a socket with a protective e
293. omation Control Program gt Start program on the controller gt Open the Create new menu with the right mouse key CMa iol xi File Edit wiew Tools Help Configuration My System Devices and Interfaces a GPIBO PCI GPIE ERT Ports Serial amp Parallel Efi Software What is Devices and Interfaces CYT Run Time Z Measurement amp Automation The Devices and Interfaces category lists installed and detected DAC og MI Spy GPIB IMAC IML Motion VISA and Vl hardware Devices and Interfaces oN MI 488 2 Software NI PAL Software AA ture If you do not see your devices Your device may not be Windows Plug and Play compatible View the configuration help file for your device trom the Help gt Help Topics menu or the instructions below for additional el 1407 0806 32 5 4 E 2 R amp S SMB Switchover to Remote Control gt Select TCP IP Resource and open the next page of the Create new menu with the right mouse key Create news E Measurement amp Y Automation Explorer Devices and Interfaces SS GPIB Interface z Le Serial Interface F fe GPIB Interface pecht Next gt Frisk Cancel E Ge gt Enter the IP address of the Signal Generator and select VXI 11 Instrument the computer name may be entered instead Create newe NNN Measurement amp Ww Automation Explorer Enter the TCPYIP address of your VISA network resource In the Tomm of vu ee eee the n
294. ommand SOUR POW MAN has no effect the command only triggers the next sweep step However the value has to be in the sweep range start to stop value In remote control only a step by step sweep from start to stop level is possible 4 51 E 2 Sweep Mode 1407 0806 32 Extern Single Extern Step Extern Start Stop R amp S SMB Sets a single sweep cycle The sweep is triggered by an external trigger signal lf a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Single mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Single sweep always starts at the start level The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG The Reset button stops the sweep and resets it to the start level Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR EXT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step lf a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Step sweep always starts at the start level The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level Remote control command SOUR SWE POW sMODE STEP SOUR SWE POW STEP 0 5 TRIG PSW SOUR EXT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started s
295. ommand selects the modulation source for frequency modulation INT is the internal modulation source which is configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector Internal and external modulation source can be selected at the same time Example FM SOUR INT selects the internal modulation source Options SCPI Compliant The command activates deactivates frequency modulation SOURce FM STATe ON OFF Activation of frequency modulation deactivates phase modulation Example FM STAT ON activates FM modulation RST value Resolution Options Correlation SCPI OFF FM ON deactivates phase Compliant modulation 1407 0806 32 6 35 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce FREQuency Subsystem This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF sources and sweeps The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted vemmens TT E a l 1S0URceJFREueneyrewi Enea eo0wz RE e ooo l 1souRceJFREueneytowi eaae oLude exclude OOOO IS0URceJFREQuencymana La 5 e oo ageet Lora age OoOO serge Ja 99 JI RESECEEERERCCRERCRSES gscrg eergmg La 5 JI RES 0 AFm t00KHe e ooo REECH sit SS isoURceIFREGuencySTOP O oomen Sd SOURce FREQuency CENTer 300 kHz RFmax RFmax depending on model The command sets the center frequency of the sweep This setting in combination with the span setting SOURce FREQuency S
296. on The correlation is as follows Freq in header RF output frequency Freq in menu Freq offset Offset in menu 1407 0806 32 9 1 E 2 Status Information R amp S SMB LEVEL OFFSET EXT REF A level offset is set The level entered and displayed in the Level field takes the offset of any downstream attenuators amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation This means that with a level offset the level displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF output but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered The signal generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset However the level entered and displayed in the Level menu of the RF Ana Mod function block always corresponds to the RF output level Any level offset is not taken into consideration The correlation is as follows Level in header RF output level Level in menu Level offset An external reference is used The external signal with selectable frequency and defined level must be input at the REF IN connector It is output at the REF OUT connector Status information displayed to the left of the Info line REMOTE REM LLO The instrument is remote controlled The key switches the instrument from remote control to manual control The current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched oth
297. on A message requesting the password appears YMC Authentication a Eb tt e 1407 0812 62 1 22 E 2 R amp S SMB Remote Access via an External Controller 5 Enter the VNC password defined in the Environment Security section of the Setup menu of R amp S SMB default instrument The connection is established when the Log On button is pressed After the connection is established the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S SMB can be manually remote controlled from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard see table in Chapter 3 section Legend of Front Panel Controls Direct control on the R amp S SMB is possible while manual remote control is established it can be performed alternately with the remote access Close Remote Access Connection via Ultr VNC The connection can be closed on the external PC by closing the VNC Viewer program Closing the connection does not disable it It can be established again any time 1407 0812 62 1 23 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Getting Started Contents Chapter 2 Getting Started 2 Getung Stared E 2 1 Introduction Getting Started urens a e A N 2 1 Description of Individual Diagram Dlocks 2 2 Av laDle BIOK E 2 2 Oa Hel Syste EE 2 3 Sue Ol SSID EE 2 4 Generation of an Amplitude Modulated
298. on signal generation etc The controller is not included The term database denotes a database that manages all the parameters and associated settings required for setting the instrument hardware Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition As this is only ever effected at the end of a command line the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant The data are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the detection is made that execution is not possible an execution error is signaled to the status reporting system All alterations of the data set are canceled the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting however impermissible instrument states can be set for a short period of time within one command line without this leading to an error message At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must have been reached again Example With Frequency Modulation the settable FM deviation depends on the set RF frequency and the FM mode The Signal Generator responds as follows Assuming the set RF frequency is 60 MHz and normal FM mode is set i e the maximum value f
299. onsideration Remote control command n a Note There is no GPIB command available for this setting The GPIB command SOUR FREQ sets the frequency of the FREQ display i e the frequency containing offset Frequency Offset RF Signal Sets the frequency offset relative to the RF frequency The frequency offset of a downstream instrument e g a mixer is entered The entry does not change the RF frequency at the RF output It only changes the RF frequency displayed in the display header the RF frequency in the header corresponds to the frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ OFFS 0 Hz If the frequency is set using the rotary knob the step width is defined in the User Variation section 1407 0806 32 4 2 E 2 RF Signal RF Variation Step RF Signal Variation Active 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Sets the user defined step width This step width is used when entering the RF frequency using the rotary knob Frequency variation with this step width must also be activated with Variation Active Remote control command SOUR FREQ STEP 1 MHz Activates the user defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the rotary knob ON The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user defined step width which is entered under Variation Step Remote control command SOUR FREQ STEP MODE USER OFF The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one unit at the curs
300. operating steps that may be required All messages are explained in the online help which can be called with the key Freq Level 1 000 000 000 0 sx 30 00 sem ALC S amp H Info Display The display shows the current signal generator state and offers graphical elements for direct operation It is divided into two sections e The frequency and level display with info line indicates the main output signal parameters and reports the current state with status error and warning messages e The block diagram shows the instrument configuration the signal characteristic as well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphics elements Active menus and info windows are displayed on top of the block diagram Freq Level 1 000 000 000 0 cre 30 00 aan lt ALC S amp H Info MOD RF w Frequency and Level Setting Display Frequency level settings and a few status messages see below are displayed in the header field of the screen The display may vary depending on the instrument s operating mode Inthe sweep mode the current frequency or level of the output signal is displayed If user correction is active the status message UCorr is displayed in the info line lt should be noted that the signal at the RF output may differ from the indicated value by a set offset frequency or level see sections RF Frequency and RF Level in chapter 4 1407 0812 62 3 4 E 2 R amp S
301. or FM deviation is 650 kHz A deviation of 1 MHz should be set To do so the RF frequncy has to be changed to e g 100 MHz The following commands are sent 1 All commands in one program message SOURSEMeSIAT ON SOURtPMIDEV LMA Zs SOUR FREQ LOOMEZ This command line yields the desired setting Since a valid state is obtained at the end of the program message no error message is issued 2 Each command in a separate program message SOUR FM STAT ON SOUR FM DEV 1MHz gt SOUR FREQ LOOMHZ 1407 0806 32 5 19 E 2 Instrument Model and Command Processing R amp S SMB The command for setting the FM deviation is rejected and an execution error is generated At the time when this command is processed the previous setting of the RF frequency 60 MHz is still valid i e the value for the FM deviation is outside the permissible value range The two other commands are set 3 The two first commands in one program message the third command in a separate program message gt SOUR FM STAT ON SOUR FM DEV 1MHz gt SOUR FREQ 100MHz The command for setting the FM deviation is rejected and an execution error is generated At the time when this command is processed the previous setting of the RF frequency 60 MHz is still valid i e the value for the FM deviation is outside the permissible value range The two other commands are executed This example shows that it is advisable to send interdependent commands in one program message
302. or entering the directory name opens Enter the name and press the Enter key Table 3 1 List of file extensions for user files the R amp S SMB assigns automatically Instrument State Instrument settings User Correction User defined level correction values uco Remote Access The R amp S SMB can be remote accessed from an external PC This allows convenient operation of the Signal Generator from the desktop although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else Remote access in contrast to remote control does not use remote control commands but the regular user interface displayed using separate software which is installed on the external PC The instrument can thus be manually operated from the PC as on the unit itself Preconditions for remote access are a connection between signal generator and PC via a LAN network and the installation of the VNC client software on the PC and on the R amp S SMB Establishing the connection and installation of the remote control software on the external PC is described in Chapter 1 section Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN After the connection is established the current signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed and the R amp S SMB can be remote accessed from the external PC The individual functions are operated using the mouse and keyboard Specific instrument functions can be executed using specific key combinations on the keyboard Front panel keys which are
303. or position standard operating mode Remote control command SOUR FREQ STEP MODE DEC 4 28 E 2 R amp S SMB RF Phase RF Phase The phase of the RF output signal can be changed in the RF Phase menu Phase Menu The Phase menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF RF Frequency Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freg Sweep Level Sweep The phase of the output signal can be changed in the Phase Settings section upper part of the group menu Phase Settings Delta Phase 0 0 deg e Reset Delta Phase Display The lower parts concern the frequency settings for the output signal and are described in the section RF Frequency page 4 26 PCNA F NASES TT ENARE Sets the phase of the RF signal The current phase of the signal is used as the reference This function allows for example the phase of the output signal to be synchronized with the phase of a signal from a second signal generator Remote control command SOUR PHAS 10 DEG Reset Delta Phase Display _ RF Phase Resets delta phase value The set phase is adopted as the new current phase i e the delta phase value is reset to 0 Remote control command SOUR PHAS REF 1407 0806 32 4 29 E 2 RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator R amp S SMB RF Reference Frequency Reference Oscillator In the internal reference mode the internal reference sign
304. or to the network is described in Chapter 1 Section Connecting the R amp S SMB to a Network LAN ATTENTION Risk of network errors Connecting errors may affect the entire network We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the network administrator Do not connect or disconnect the network cable until the instrument is switched off standby Only then the network connection can be reliably detected and impairments to instrument operation can be avoided Get System Settings Common Settings Hostname rssmb100a11011 Accept MAC Address 00 90 bs 18 6d f4 IP Address Auto DHCP e Accept DNS Server Settings DNS Server Address Mode Auto sl Accept 1407 0806 32 4 11 E 2 General Instrument Settings R amp S SMB The menu is divided into the sections Common Settings where the general network environment is defined IP Address section where the specific identification of the computer in the network is defined and DNS Server Settings where the DNS server is entered New entries are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Accept Network Settings Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings accordingly Remote control command SYST COMM NETW DNS SET SYST COMM NETW COMM SET SYST COMM NETW IPAD SET The indications of the menu menu are only updated after pressing the Get System Settings button Get System Settings H
305. ostname MAC Address Mode 1407 0806 32 Retrieves the current system settings of the instrument The indications in the network menu are only updated after pressing this button Remote control command SYST COMM NETW GET Enters the individual computer name of the R amp S SMB Note The computer name can only be changed after protection level 1 is deactivated see section Protection Setup Protection A new entry is only accepted and the hostname changed after the Accept button is pressed A predefined name is indicated and can be used for network connections We recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network Remote control command SYST COMM NETW HOST RSSMB100A123456 Indicates the MAC address of the network adapter Remote control command SYST COMM NETW MAC Selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually or if a Peer to Peer connection is used The selection is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed We recommend that connection of the instrument to the network be coordinated with the network administrator Connection errors may affect the entire network 4 12 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings IP Address Subnet Mask Def Gateway 1407 0806 32 Auto DHCP The IP address is assigned automatically The network used must support automatic assign
306. otective circuit for the RF output RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 21 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB OUTPut PROTection TRIPped The command queries the state of the protective circuit The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example OUTP PROT TRIP queries the state of the protective circuit for RF output A Response 0 the protective circuit has not tripped Response 1 the protective circuit has tripped RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant OUTPut STATe ON OFF This command activates and deactivates the RF output Example OUTP OFF deactivates the RF output RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant OUTPut STATe PON OFF UNCHanged This command selects the state which the RF output assumes when the instrument is switched on The command is an event and therefore has no RST value and no query form Parameters OFF The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on UNCHanged When the instrument is switched on the output remains in the same state as it was when the instrument was switched off Example OUTP PON OFF The RF output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 22 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce Subsystem The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the genera
307. ower section of the window additional information on the highlighted message is displayed A history of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on can be called with the History button The most recent message is displayed first ALC Auto info io line SCP List of current messages with short message text Wrpn 221 Pep value greater than defined upp No pending errors Detailed description for highlighted message History History of all messages The messages are color coded according to their level Device specific messages are red info and remote control error are black The level is also indicated in the Lev column Err Sys or Info Column SCPI indicates the SCPI error code With the aid of the softkey buttons error messages can be cleared and a history of all messages called Delete Clears the highlighted message This button is available only if the history of the message Is displayed Remote control command n a Delete All Clears all messages This button is available only if the history of the message is displayed Remote control command SYST ERR ALL Each time a SYSTem ERRor ALL query is sent the error queue is returned and at the same time cleared History Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch on The most recent messages are displayed at the top of the list When the button is pressed again the list of current messages is displayed Remote control
308. p spacing dwell time and the external trigger slope are set in the bottom section Start Freq LF Sweep Stop Freq LF Sweep Current Freq LF Sweep Spacing LF Sweep Step Lin Log LF Sweep Dwell Time LF Sweep 1407 0806 32 Sets the start frequency Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ STAR 100kHz Sets the stop frequency Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ STOP 50kHz Displays the current frequency If Step is set the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here Remote control command SOUR LFO FREQ MAN 15 kHz Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ SPAC LIN LOG Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps This entry is effective for all sweep modes Step Lin or Step Log is displayed depending on whether Spacing Lin or Log is selected Step Lin With the linear sweep the step width is a fixed frequency value which is added to the current frequency The linear step width is entered in Hz Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LIN 1 kHz Step Log With the logarithmic sweep the step width is a constant fraction of the current frequency This fraction is added to the current frequency The logarithmic step width is entered in Remote control command SOUR LFO SWE FREQ STEP LOG 1 PCT Sets the dwell time The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps Note It is
309. p types frequency sweep level sweep and LF sweep to be activated alternatively Each type has 6 modes which differ with respect to the sweep cycle mode continuous individual and step by step and triggering mode automatic internal and external In the Mod Gen block the LF sweep is configured Frequency and Level sweep settings are accessed via the RF block The status display in the block shows whether LF generator and or a sweep are active Modulation block I Modulation config r On The internal and external analog modulations are configured and activated in this block The key switches the active modulation s on off 1407 0812 62 2 2 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Description of Individual Diagram Blocks The internal modulation sources are configured in the Mod Gen block The modulation inputs MOD EXT and PULSE EXT at the front and rear of the instrument are provided for external amplitude frequency phase and pulse modulation AC or DC coupling for external feed is possible Modulation signals of up to two sources internal and external source can be combined for AM FM and PhiM modulation Available internal and external analog modulation modes are Amplitude modulation AM Frequency modulation FM Phase modulation PhiM Pulse modulation optional PULSE Note For modulation modes that c
310. pairs LIST DEXC AFIL EXT TXT selects that ASCII files with extension txt are listed LEST DEXC TAF INeCAT queries the available files with extension txt Response listi list2 the ASCII files List1 txt and 1ist2 txt are available 1407 0806 32 6 52 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST DEXChange AFILe SELect lt ascii_file_name gt The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions txt or csv in a directory of the user s choice The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command MMEMory CDIR A path can also be specified in command SOUR LIST DEXC AFIL SEL in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists LISTIDEXC AFIL SEL var ts genl LSstmode imports list esy selects that ASCII file list csv is imported LIST DEXC SEL var rs gen l1stmode import last imp selects that the ASCII file list csv is imported into list mode list list_imp ee SOURce LIST DEXChange AFiLe SEParator COLumn TABulator SEMicolon COMMa SPACe The command selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table Example LIST DEXC MODE EXP selects that the list mode list is exported into an ASCII file Li oT
311. perties of the RF output connector The properties of the LF output connector are set in the SOURce LFOutput system see section SOURce LFOutout Subsystem vemmens TT dk OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer Iopm Queryony a a K T E oeuse Io O O OO SSS oo o o FourpurrorecionGieer ll o omamgtegeripeg ll o omasa L oo S S omasa owce ll OUTPut AMODe AUTO NORMal The command switches the mode of the attenuator at the RF output Attenuator MODe Parameters AUTO The attenuator is switched automatically The level settings are made in the full range FiXed The level settings are made without switching the attenuator When this operating mode is switched on the attenuator is fixed in its current position and the resulting variation range is defined Example POW ALC ON activates automatic level control for RF output OUTP AMOD FIX sets the fixed mode with uninterrupted level for the RF output RST value Resolution Options SCPI AUTO BO Device specific D OUTPut AFIXed RANGe LOWer The command queries the minimum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FlXed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP AFIX RANG LOW queries the minimum level for the FlXed setting Response 5 07 the minimum level is 50 dBm RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 20 E 2 R amp S SMB Command De
312. ple STAT OPER ENAB 32767 all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus PRESet The command resets the status registers All PT Ransition parts are set to FFFFh 3276 7 i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to O i e a transition from 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENABle parts of STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on The command triggers an event and therefore has no query form and no RST value Example STAT PRES resets the status registers RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 85 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB STATus QUEStionable EVENt The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last readout The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out Example STAT OPER EVEN queries the Status Questionable Event register RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant STATus QUEStionable CONDition The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicat
313. ration cannot be execute because the file name is not specified Example A file name has to be entered when creating a new list SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 12 E 2 R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages Hardware revision out of date 201 A later version of certain parts of the instrument is necessary to execute the function selected Example The driver does not support the installed version of a module SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Invalid EEPROM data 203 Reading a EEPROM is possible however the data are inconsistent SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Invalid filename extension 464 The file extension is not valid for the desired operation Example The file extension for user correction files is uco It is not possible to enter another file extension when storing a user correction file SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register No current list 241 There is no list selected To execute the desired operation a list has to be selected in the related menu If no list is available a new list must be created Example The user correction mode is enable without a list being selected SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register This modulation forces other modulations off 140 A modulation has been switched on which cannot be used at the same
314. recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times Remote control command 4 80 E 2 R amp S SMB LF Generator and LF Output Mod Gen Block DOUR LFO SWE FREQ DWEG LOms Ext Trigger Input Slope LF Sweep Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger This setting affects the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG LF Output Menu The LF Output menu is opened in the Mod Gen function block or using the key under Mod Gen Mod Gen LF Freq Sweep The LF Output menu provides access to the configuration of the internal modulation generators In addition the LF output is configured in this menu The available settings depend on the source selected and on the installed options In the upper section of the menu the LF output is switched on The configuration of the internal source is performed in the lower section of the LF Output menu or in the individual modulation menus of the Mod block e g Amplitude Modulation menu These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources and the LF output Output Voltage 1 000 Yy LFGen Frequency 35 0000 kHz LFGen Shap
315. rectly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control EXTernal EXTernal Ext Single and Ext Step mode The command LFO SWEep MODE is used to select between the two sweep modes Parameters AUTO IMMediate The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGle One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands LFOutput SWEep EXEC or TRG The mode has to be set to AUTO SOURce LFOutput SWEep MODE AUTO EXTernal The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector 1407 0806 32 6 99 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB EAUTo The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started A second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency a third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency and so on Example TRIGO SOUR EXT selects triggering with an external trigger The trigger is input via the INST TRIG connector RST value Resolution Options SCPI SINGle CH Device specific TRIGger FSWeep IMMediate The command immediate
316. register Suffix not allowed 138 A suffix is not allowed for this command or at this point of the command Example Command RCL does not permit indicating a suffix SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Suffix too long 134 The suffix contains more than 12 characters SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register Syntax error 102 The command is invalid Example The command contains block data the instrument does not accept SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register System error 310 This error message suggests an error within the instrument Please inform the R amp S Service SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Too many digits 124 The decimal numeric data element contains too many digits SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 9 E 2 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages R amp S SMB Too much data 223 More data were sent by the host than the signal generator can handle SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register Undefined header 113 The sent command header has not been defined Example Header XyYZ is undefined for every instrument SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 10 E 2 R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages The following list contains all error messages specific of t
317. res the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enables disables the LAN interfaces Any device connected to the LAN interface is not recognized by the instrument when the interface is disabled The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a Enters the security password that is required to enable or disabled the LAN or USB interface Default is 123456 All settings are only accepted after the Accept button is pressed Remote control commands n a 4 10 E 2 R amp S SMB General Instrument Settings Date and Time Setup Environment The Date Time menu provides access to the system time and date settings It is opened using the or key under Environment The time is used on the internal controller Date DD MM Y YYY 23 03 2007 Time hh mm ss 12 27 19 Date Enters the date in the format day month year Remote control command SYST DATE 2007 03 20 Time Enters the time in the format hour minute second Remote control command SYST TIME 23 59 59 Network Settings Setup Environment The Network Settings menu provides access to the network settings It is opened using the or key under Environment The R amp S SMB is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network How to connect the signal generat
318. rks for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The VISUAL BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus or via the Ethernet Parallel Poll In a parallel poll the controller uses a single command to request up to eight instruments to transmit one bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 In addition to the SRE register which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a parallel poll enable register PPE This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll by means of the command IST 1407 0806 32 5 26 E 2 R amp S SMB Status Reporting System The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the VISUAL BASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response Is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the IEC IEEE bus has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the sa
319. rnal Impedance 50 Ohm sl EECHER Activates deactivates pulse modulation When the internal modulation source pulse generator is selected the pulse generator is switched on automatically and the video sync signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO output at the rear of the instrument Signal output can be switched off in the Pulse Generator menu of the Mod Gen block Remote control command SOUR PULM STAT ON 1407 0806 32 4 72 E 2 R amp S SMB Pulse Modulation Source Pulse Modulation co ects the source for the pulse modulation signal Pulse Selects the internal pulse generator Senerator The internally generated rectangular signal is used for the pulse modulation Remote control command SOUR PULM SOUR INT External Selects the external source The external modulation signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM SOUR EXT Polarity Pulse Modulation Source External only Selects the polarity of the external modulation signal Normal The RF level is On if the level is High at the modulation input Remote control command SOUR PULM POL NORM Inverse The RF level is Off if the level is High at the modulation input Remote control command SOUR PULM POL INV Pulse External Input Impedance Source External only Selects the impedance for external feed via the PULSE EXT input Selection 50 Ohm and 10 kOhm are available Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG EXT IMP G50
320. rol Basics 5 Remote Control Basics Introduction Remote Control Basics This chapter provides e Instructions on how to set up the signal generator for remote control operation e A general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments This includes the description of the command structure and syntax according to the SCPI standard the description of command execution and of the status registers The remote control commands of the instrument are described in detail after each related Instrument Function section In addition the description of each menu parameter is linked to the related remote control command In chapter Remote Control Commands all remote control functions are described in detail The subsystems are listed by alphabetical order according to SCPI SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands instrument control commands are used for remote control The instrument is equipped with the following interfaces for remote control EC IEEE bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 2 LAN interface the network card uses 100 MHz Ethernet IEEE 802 3u the protocol is based on the VXI 11 standard USB interface The type B interface device USB is used for remote control The connectors are located at the rear of the instrument and permit a connection to a controller for remote control either directly or via a local area network LAN The remote control interface
321. rol command SOUR PULM DEL 22us Enables disables double pulse generation The two pulses are generated in one pulse period Remote control command SOUR PULM DOUB STAT ON Double Pulse only Sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation Remote control command SOUR PULM DOUB WIDT 33 us Double Pulse only Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse Remote control command SOUR PULM DOUB DEL 22us Selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation Auto The pulse generator signal is generated continuously Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE AUTO Ext Triggered The pulse generator signal is triggered by an external trigger event The trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE EXT 4 74 E 2 R amp S SMB External Trigger Input Slope Pulse Generator Gate Input Polarity Pulse Generator External Impedance Pulse Generator 1407 0806 32 Pulse Modulation Ext Gated The pulse generator signal is gated by an external gate signal The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector Remote control command SOUR PULM TRIG MODE EGAT External Trigger only Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger at the PULSE EXT connector Positive The pulse generator is triggered on the positive slope of the external trigger signal Remote control command SOUR PULM
322. rument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from section Overview of the Status Register an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in the enable registers SRE and ESE Example Use command opc to generate an SRQ gt CALL IBWRT generator ESE 1 set bit 0 of ESE Operation Complete gt CALL IBWRT generator SRE 32 set bit 5 of SRE ESB After its settings have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll just as upon the command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is made via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method has already been defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also wo
323. rument functions are described in detail in Chapter 4 nstrument Functions 1407 0812 62 2 3 E 2 Example of Setup R amp S SMB Example of Setup A central element of the R amp S SMB display is the block diagram that illustrates the signal flow Each block represents a section of signal generation The main settings of a block are indicated in the block The interconnection of employed inputs and outputs is also shown The user is thus always informed about the connection of inputs and outputs in the signal flow and where they can be configured A window is opened for each menu where parameters can be set All open menus are of equal priority not modal and can be accessed any time The R amp S SMB can be entirely operated from the front panel Peripherals such as mouse or keyboard can be connected but are not essential With the aid of the rotary knob the user can navigate in the block diagram and the dialogs The cursor is moved line by line through the block diagram or dialog Turning the button clockwise advances the cursor The selected block can be activated or deactivated with the key Active blocks are highlighted by a colored background Generation of an Amplitude Modulated Signal In the example a simple AM modulated signal is configured Proceed as described below 1 Activate default preset state 2 Select and activate AM modulation 3 Set frequency and level and activate RF signal Step 1 Activate default preset
324. s and their interface functions are described in Chapter Maintenance and Remote Control Interfaces A VISA installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN or USB interface VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands messages are used for remote control Commands that are not taken from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI Not all of the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard however their syntax follows SCPI rules This section assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sections Tables provide a fast over
325. s automatic level control RST value Resolution Options SCPI sao e eT Compliant SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude Minimum level Maximal level The command sets the RF output level in CW mode In addition to numerical values it is also possible to specify UP and DOWN The level is then increased or decreased by the value specified under SOURce POWer STEP As with the Level value entered in the header the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer OFFSet is set to 0 The value range for other OF FSet values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level OFFSet Maximum level OFFSet The keywords of this command are largely optional Therefore both the long and short form of the command are shown in the example Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example SOUR POW LEV IMM AMPL 15 or POW 15 sets the RF level at output A to 15 dBm RST value Resolution Options 30dBmn food oO l E 1407 0806 32 6 67 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 100 dB 100 dB Caution The level offset is also effective for level sweeps The command specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator ampilifier If a leve
326. s messages and a list of error messages that the R amp S SMB may generate Chapter 10 contains an index for the operating manual Service Manual Instrument The service manual instrument informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all in formation required for the maintenance of R amp S SMB by ex changing modules In addition it describes how to perform a firmware update and how to install options The Internet site at Signal Generator R amp S SMB100A provides the most up to date information on the R amp S SMB The current operat ing manual at a time is available as printable PDF file in the download area Also provided for download are firmware updates including the associated release notes instrument drivers current data sheets and application notes 0 3 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Putting into Operation Contents Chapter 1 Putting into Operation 1407 0812 62 1 Putting into Operau ON ticneeierete sited tea 1 1 Introduction Putting into Operation 1 1 Legend for Front Panel TE 1 1 Legend for Rear Panel View 1 9 PUIG Bi te A ee EE 1 12 Unpacking the Instrument 1 12 Setting up the Instrument or Installing it in a 19 Rack cceeeeeee 1 12 SAE INSTOCUON S einn ae Deusen eee aera 1 13 EMG Salely Precautions E 1 14 Connecting the R amp S SMB to the AC Gupphy ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 1 15 EE aortas ic
327. s not affect data lists Example ee Waryiliste last mode lists selects 1ist3 for editing List3 is created if it does not yet exist SOURS LISIT FREQ 1i46he E Een Al ZGHZy wx specifies the frequency values in 1ist3 If the list already contains data it is overwritten RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SOURce LIST FREQuency POINts The command queries the length in points of the FREQuency component of the selected list The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example List Seis Var_lists Listmode7 lists selects 1ist3 for editing List3 is created if it does not yet exist LIST FREQ POIN queries the number of frequency values in list3 Response 327 list3 has 327 frequency entries RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant SOURce LIST INDex STARt 0 list length The command sets the start index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency level value pairs in the current list Only the values in the set index range LIST INDex STARt LIST INDex STOP are processed in List mode Example GIST SEL vary li sts lastmod e Jist3 selects list3 for use in List mode LESTPIND STAR 25 sets 25 as start index of the index range LIST IND STOP 49 sets 49 as stop index of the index range FREQ MODE LIST activates List mode The frequency level value pairs from index 25 to index 49 in list3 are processed All other
328. s of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more details refer to the VXI 11 specification TCP IP Instrument Protocol Specification VXI 11 Revision 1 0 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXlbus and TCP IP IEEE 488 2 Instrument Interface Specification VXI 11 3 Draft 0 8 VMEbus Extensions for Instrumentation VXlbus 1407 0806 32 8 5 E 2 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMB ma SS SS E ee Se ee ae a ae ae w Core channel program response control messages Instrument meen Im Controller Abort channel abort Interrupt channel Service request Fig 8 3 VXI 11 channels between instrument and controller The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This distinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a PC are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller Fig 8 4 Remote control via LAN from several controllers The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers In the Measurement amp Automation Control program this setting is made on the Template tab 1407 0806 32 8 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Hard
329. s the INST TRIG input BNC connector at the rear of the instrument Positive The rising edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP POS Negative The falling edge of the trigger signal is active Remote control command SOUR INP TRIG SLOP NEG 4 49 E 2 Sweep Mode R amp S SMB Level Sweep Menu The Level Sweep menu is opened in the RF function block or using the key under RF S est DE REON Frequency Phase Ref Oscillator Level EMF Auto Level Control User Correction RF Freq Sweep In the top section of the menu the Level Sweep mode is activated and the level range and the sweep mode are selected The buttons are used to reset the level sweep all sweep modes or to execute the level sweep Single mode Reset Sweep Start Level 30 00 dBm Stop Level 10 00 dBm sl Current Level 18 00 dBm Step 1 00 dB Dwell Time 10 0 ms sl The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section State RF Level Sweep Activates Level Sweep mode Note Activating the level sweep automatically deactivates the RF sweep and LF sweep Remote control commands SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR POW MODE CW 1407 0806 32 4 50 E 2 R amp S SMB Mode RF Level Sweep 1407 0806 32 Sweep Mode Selects the Level Sweep instrument operating mode and the Sweep mode Auto Single Step Sets an automatic r
330. s the key For a description of the Help menu refer to the section covering to the key see section Helo System Help Key on page 4 18 Switching to Manual Control Local Key In remote control mode a status message appears in the display header The rest of the display remains unchanged and shows the current instrument status i e the status which exists under the remote control settings The instrument can be operated e g menus can be opened However it is not possible to enter or change values The status message additionally indicates whether the key is disabled or enabled see also Chapter 5 Chapter 5 section Switch Over to Remote Control If the REMOTE status message is shown the key switches the instrument from remote control to manual control The current command must be fully processed before the mode Is switched otherwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote control If the REM LLO status message remote local lockout is displayed the instrument can be switched from remote control to manual control by means of remote control only e g with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC generator 3 the key is disabled The key is disabled by remote control with the interface message LLO When switching from remote to manual control the display update suppression function if active SETUP GUI Update is Off is automatically deactivated SETUP GUI Update is On 1407 0806 32 4 17 E 2 Messages
331. scription OUTPut AFIXed RANGe UPPer The command queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being adjusted Attenuator FlXed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP AFIX RANG UPP queries the maximum level for the FlXed setting for the RF output Response 27 the maximum level is 27 dBm RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific OUTPut IMPedance The command queries the impedance of the RF output This permits converting the output level between units V and W The impedances cannot be changed The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP IMP queries the impedance of the RF output Response 50 the impedance is 50 ohms RST value Resolution Options SCPI Compliant OUTPut BLANK LIST STATe ON OFF The command activates deactivates RF output blanking The command is a query and therefore has no RST value Example OUTP BLAN LIST STAT ON activates the RF Output blanking RST value Resolution SCPI ON Device specific OUTPut lt 1 2 gt PROTection CLEar The command resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped The state of the output is again determined by OUTPut STATe The output is protected by a protective circuit which deactivates the output in the case of an externally applied overvoltage This does not change the value of OUTPut STATe Example OUTP PROT CLE resets the pr
332. settings can thus be made by a keystroke operation is easy For instance the key closes the active menu with the key the RF output signal can be switched on or off An exception are keys that call a menu such as the key which opens the complete menu tree of the R amp S SMB the key which opens the menus for general instrument settings or the FILE key which opens the menu for file management Help functions support the user Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration Context sensitive help for each parameter can be called with the key Contents Index Back Previous Next Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup All Parameters and switching states are preset aleo those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings Remote contral command RS Be Each help page is part of a comprehensive online help function which can be called by means of the Content Index Back Previous and Next links 1407 0812 62 3 3 E 2 Display R amp S SMB Messages indicate the current instrument state A great variety of different messages such as status messages error messages warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen With the aid of the key help pages can be called for most of the messages They provide background information on the message and indicate
333. source for the FM signal The source can be selected independently for the different modulation types and the LF output The configuration of the selected external and or internal modulation source is performed in the lower section of the menu or in the Mod Gen block internal source only Int Ext Int Ext FM Mode FM Selects the internal source for FM modulation Remote control command SOUR FM SOUR INT Selects the external source for analog frequency modulation The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector Remote control command SOUR FM SOUR EXT Selects the internal and external source at the same time This setting enables two tone FM modulation Remote control command SOUR FM SOUR INT EXT Selects the mode for the frequency modulation Normal 1407 0806 32 The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is available Remote control command SOUR FM MODE NORM 4 66 E 2 R amp S SMB Frequency Modulation FM FM Deviation FM Sensitivity Adjust FM Offset 1407 0806 32 Low Noise Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced see data sheet Remote control command SOUR FM MODE LNO High Deviation Frequency modulation with full setting range for FM deviation The range for modulation bandwidth is reduced see data sheet Remote control command SOUR
334. specific SOURce POWer STOP Minimum level Maximum level The command sets the stop level in Sweep mode As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu the OF FSet value is also taken into consideration with this command The specified value range is therefore only effective if SOURce POWer OFFSet Is set to 0 The value range for other OF Fset values can be calculated using the following formula Minimum level OFFSet Maximum level OFFSet Parameters Minimum level Maximum level The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model The values are given in the data sheet Example POW STOP 3 sets the stop level for the level sweep to 3 dBm RST value Resolution Options SCPI 10dBm Jona Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 71 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce PULM and PGEN Subsystem The PULM subsystem contains the commands for checking the pulse modulation The external signal is input at the PULSE EXT connector The connector can be used as trigger input for internal pulse modulation The polarity and input impedance of the connector can be selected The PGEN Subsystem contains the command for activating deactivating the output of the video sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector The keyword SOURCce is optional with commands and can be omitted geet Gemen ks REECH 1s SOURce PULM PERiod 5us 85 s 100ns 85 s SOURce PULM POLarity NORMal INVerted SOURc
335. ssing the key To indicate the active state the RF block is displayed in blue An RF signal with the default frequency and level settings is output i e 1 GHz and 30 dBm The single sweep still must be triggered in the sweep menu Step 4 Trigger single RF frequency sweep Select the Execute Single Sweep button in the RF Freq Sweep menu by turning the rotary knob Press the rotary knob A linear single sweep from 100 MHz to 500 MHz in 1 MHz steps is output with a dwell time of 10 ms per step 1407 0812 62 2 10 E 2 Contents Manual Operation R amp S SMB Contents Chapter 3 Manual Operation 1407 0812 62 3 Manual ODOR i ME 3 1 Introduction Manual Operaton 3 1 Operating Concept 3 1 PIS EE 3 4 Frequency and Level Setting Display cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 3 4 Status Information and Messages Display 3 5 Jee VWWINGOW DISHA EEN 3 6 BIOCK Diagrami DIS DIAY EE 3 7 Menu Structure Re EE 3 8 Selen 3 10 Calling a Menu Setting Parameters snonnnnnsnnnseennneeeeeserrrrreessrrnreneeee 3 10 Selecting a Control Element Setting Harameterg 3 11 Switching Parameters On Off Setting Harameiers 3 11 Selecting and Exiting a Menu Area Setting Parameters 00000 n 3 12 Entering a Value Setting Parameters AE 3 13 Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters nnnnnnnnoeeennnnnonernnnrereeesrer renee 3 14 Selecting a Value from a List Setting Parameters
336. successful Example The module is not installed not properly installed or missing SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 11 E 2 Alphabetical List of Device Specific Error Messages R amp S SMB Cannot open file 460 The selected file can not be opened Remedy Check the path and file name SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot read file 462 The file can not be read Example The file contents are not compatible with the file type SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Cannot write file 461 The file can not be written Example The file is read only SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Driver initialization failed 204 Initialization of a driver fails when booting the instrument firmware Example The driver is not compatible with the hardware or software configuration of the instrument SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register File contains invalid data 465 The selected file contains data that is not valid for the file type The file extension determines the data that is valid for this file type If the file extension is changed the lists are no longer recognized and the data are therefore invalid Example The extension of a waveform file wv was changed to txt SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Filename missing 463 The desired ope
337. sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR EAUT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section Execute Single Sweep RF Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Frequency Sweep Mode Single only 1407 0806 32 Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR SWE FREQ MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR SING SOUR FREQ MODE SWE SOUR SWE FREQ EXEC 4 47 E 2 Sweep Mode Reset Sweep RF Frequency Sweep Start Freq RF Frequency Sweep Stop Freq RF Frequency Sweep Center Freq RF Frequency Sweep Span RF Frequency Sweep Current Freq RF Frequency Sweep Spacing RF Frequency Sweep Step Lin Log RF Frequency Sweep 1407 0806 32 R amp S SMB Resets the sweep The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there Remote control command SWE RES ALL Sets the start frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ STAR 100MHz Sets the stop frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ STOP 500MHz Sets the center frequency Remote control command SOUR FREQ CENT 300MHz Sets the span Remote control com
338. switching off of incompatible types of modulation or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument e g range violations They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background They are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of time They are stored in the history however Remote control command SYST ERR Or SYST ERR ALL Permanent messages Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument operation e g a hardware fault The error signalled by a permanent message must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured The message is displayed until the error is eliminated It covers the status display in the info line After error elimination the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history Remote control command SYST SERR 1407 0812 62 3 9 E 2 Display R amp S SMB Info Window Display A few operating states and the current message are displayed in the info line see also Chapter 9 Error Messages The info window with a list of current permanent messages and a detailed description of each message can be opened with the key The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages in the order of their occurrence i e the most recent message is displayed first In the l
339. t Data 4 4 6 7 User EIERE Ge 4 39 6 25 User Correction Data 4 40 6 26 V Value User Cormechon 4 40 e ee 3 21 6 14 ee e ACV EE 4 28 Variation ten 4 28 4 35 6 40 6 70 6 71 Video Sync Signal estate 4 82 6 72 Virus protection software 1 19 Visa Resource String Ethernet ccccecee 4 16 6 93 Visa Resource String USPE 6 93 VNC CONNECCION riesta Eed 1 21 Vollage LF e 4 81 6 48 Voltage TeS e e 4 8 W Wait Time Setup 4 15 6 10 WANI S e AE 399 3 WALES PICE eeler tok Gun a ee 5 17 R amp S SMB Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com 1407 0806 32 10 6 E 2
340. t Mode Extension List Mode Decimal Point List Mode Column Separator List Mode 1407 0806 32 List Mode Save as Open the file menu to save the list under a new name Each list is saved to the R amp S SMA Signal Generator CompactFlash Card as a separate file with the file prefix lsw The file name and the directory to which the file is saved are user selectable Remote control command n a Save The list is saved under its current name Remote control command n a the list is saved automatically after the values have been entered Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index Only the values in the selected index range are processed in LIST mode all other list entries are ignored Remote control command SOUR LIST ND STAR 15 SOUR LIST IND STOP 155 Expands the menu with the area for import and export of list mode files Externally edited Excel tables with frequency level pairs can be imported as text or CSV files and used for list mode On the other hand internally created list mode list can be exported as text or CSV files Selects if list mode lists should be imported or exported The settings offered below depend on the selected mode Remote control command SOUR LIST DEXC MODE IMP Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Selection TXT text file or CSV Excel file is available Remote control command SOUR LIST
341. ta before the response has been sent completely SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Query unterminated 420 This query is missing or incomplete Example The instrument is addressed as a talker and receives incomplete data SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Query deadlocked 430 This query cannot be processed Example The input and output buffers are full the instrument cannot be operated SCPI Query error error in data request sets bit 2 in the ESR register Self test failed 330 An error was detected in the selftest named after the semicolon An error free operation of the module concerned is no longer guaranteed SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 8 E 2 R amp S SMB Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages Settings conflict 221 There is a setting conflict between the two parameters indicated after the semicolon Example The set FM deviation is too large for the selected RF frequency Remedy One of the given values has to be corrected to obtain a valid output signal SCPI Execution error sets bit 4 in the ESR register String data not allowed 158 The command contains a legal string data element which is not allowed at this point Example A text parameter is set in quotation marks SOURce FREQuency MODE FIxXed SCPI Command error sets bit 5 in the ESR
342. table value pairs frequency and level can be created The value range for frequency and level covers the entire configurable value range of the instrument Note LIST mode and sweeps can not be activated simultaneously they deactivate each other The lists can be created in the List Editor Each list is stored in its own file with the predefined file extension Isw The name of the List file can be freely selected The files are loaded from the Lists file manager Externally created tables with pairs of frequency and level values can be converted into List files using the import function The external files must have the file extension txt or csv These file formats are provided e g by the Microsoft Excel program The separators for table columns and for decimal floating point numerals can be set In addition internally created List data can be exported into ASCII files using the export function The necessary hardware settings are calculated the first time a list is processed With long dwell times this calculation can be performed while the list is being processed the entered dwell times are observed With very short dwell times calculation of the hardware settings increases the dwell time for the initial processing cycle the entered value is only observed from the second processing cycle onwards In this case a message appears to inform the user that there is a deviation between the current and set dwell times No further calculatio
343. te The command has the same effect as pressing the key The default setting is given in the description of the commands 1407 0806 32 6 4 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SAV SAVE stores the current device state under the specified number see also RCL The command is used to store the 3 intermediate instrument states and to store the current instrument state internally when the instrument is switched off This state is then restored at power on SRE 025 255 SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE sets the service request enable register to the specified value Bit 6 MSS enable bit remains 0 This command determines the conditions under which a service request is triggered The SRE query command reads out the content of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 STB READ STATUS BYTE QUERY reads out the content of the status byte in decimal form TRG TRIGGER triggers all actions which are waiting for a trigger event Specific trigger events can be triggered by means of the IT RIGger command system sweep and lists TST SELF TEST QUERY triggers all self tests of the instrument and outputs an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument WAI WAIT to CONTINUE does not allow subsequent commands to be processed until all previous commands have been executed and all signals are in their transient condition 1407 0806 32 6 5 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB
344. ted RST does not affect data lists Example LIST SEL var lists listmode list3 selects 1ist3 for editing List3 is created if it does not yet exist RST value Resolution Options SCPI SOURce LIST TRIiGger EXECute The command immediately starts the processing of a list in list mode It corresponds to the manual control command Execute Single It is only valid for setting LIST MODE AUTO The command triggers an event and therefore has no reset value Example LIST MODE STEP selects a full cycle processing of the list SOUR LIST TRIG EXEC triggers the processing of the selected list RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 59 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LIST TRIGger SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe EXTernalP The command sets the trigger source for the LIST mode The names of the parameters correspond to those under sweep mode SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO SINGle BUS MODE SINGLE or STEP EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP Parameters AUTO The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously The selected list in List mode is restarte
345. ted signals The keyword SOURGCe is optional and can be ommitted SOURce AM Subsystem The AM subsystem contains the commands for checking the amplitude modulation The AM specific characteristics of the internal modulation source are defined with commands SOURce AM INTernal Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in the SOURce LFOutput subsystem The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector The keyword SOURGe is optional with commands and can be omitted ES EREECHEN SOURce JAM EXTemal GOUPIing AC DC rs geriet ll RESECEEEECRERERECEE ogerange Jerne Il sowmemmsme Joro J SOURce AM DEPTh D 100 PCT The command sets the overall modulation depth of the amplitude modulation in percent Example AM 15PCT sets the AM modulation depth to 15 percent RST value Resolution Options SCPI 30 PCT See data sheet Compliant SOURce AM EXTernal COUPling AC DC The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input MOD EXT in the case of amplitude modulation Parameters AC The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation signal DC The modulation signal is not changed Example AM EXT COUP AC selects the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation RST value Resolution Options SCPI AC Compliant 1407 0806 32 6 23 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce JAM INTernal DEPTh 0 50 PCT This command
346. tely but if not they are automatically determined the list is learnt A Learn List Mode Data button is available for deliberately activating list learning Note Activating the list mode automatically deactivates all sweeps During list mode the frequency and level indications are dimmed they do not display the currently set values Remote control command SOUR FREQ MODE LIST Selects the cycle mode of the LIST mode Auto Cycle from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at the beginning The duration of a list step is determined by the set dwell time Button Reset restarts the list at the starting point Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR AUTO 4 55 E 2 List Mode 1407 0806 32 Single Step Extern Single Extern Step R amp S SMB Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list If Single is selected the cycle is not started immediately The Execute Single button appears under the Mode line The cycle is started with this button The duration of a list step is determined by the set dwell time Button Reset restarts the list at the starting point Mode Single ae Execute Single Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR SING SOUR LIST TRIG EXEC Manual step by step processing of the list Activating Step stops the current list and the cursor moves to the value displa
347. th of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration Example DIAG BGIN CAT queries the names of the assemblies Response BABO RFBO RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 8 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Command Description DIAGnostic INFO OTIMe The command queries the number of operation hours Example DIAG INFO OTM queries the operation hours Response 100023 the instrument was operated for 100023 hours up to now RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific DIAGnostic INFO PCOunter The command queries the number of power on events Example DIAG INFO POC queries the number of power on events Response 123 the instrument was switched on for 123 times up to now RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific DIAGnostic POINt CATalog The command queries the test points available in the instrument A detailed description of the test points can be found in chapter 3 section Trouble Shooting of the Service Manual on CD ROM supplied with the instrument Example DIAG POIN CAT queries the test points available in the instrument Response DIAG_SMB_BAB_P7V DIAG_SMB_BAB_P5V DIAG_SMB_BAB_P3V3 RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific DIAGnostic MEASure POINt The
348. the key on the front panel or with the interface command amp GTL via the remote control interface Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect the remaining instrument settings In the remote control mode the front panel keys and an external mouse or keyboard that may be connected can be disabled with command SYST KLOC ON Menus cannot be opened in this case and switchover from remote control to manual operation is only possible by means of a remote control command Inadvertent switchover with the key is not possible in this case Operation of the key alone can be disabled with interface command amp LLo Remote Control via IEC IEEE Bus To be able to control the instrument via the IEC IEEE bus instrument and controller must be linked by an IEC IEEE bus cable An IEC IEEE bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller The controller must address the instrument with the set IEC IEEE bus address The IEC IEEE bus address of the instrument is factory set to 28 It can be changed manually in the Environment GPIB menu or via IEC IEEE bus with command SySTem COMMunicate GPIB ADDRess Addresses 0 to 30 are permissible Manually Via IEC IEEE bus CALL IBFIND DEV1L generators Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Inform controller about old address CALL IBWRT generator SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 Get i
349. the command SYSTem ERRor If the error queue is empty 0 No error is returned Status Information The status messages are displayed in the header section of the screen The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the signal generator The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user Status information is displayed between the frequency and level fields at the left of the info line or in the info line itself Status information displayed between the frequency and level fields RF OFF The RF output is switched off MOD OFF All modulations are switched off FREQ OFFSET A frequency offset is set The frequency entered and displayed in the frequency field takes any set frequency offset into consideration e g an offset set for a downstream instrument This means that with a frequency offset the frequency displayed in the header does not correspond to the frequency at the RF output but rather to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument This allows the desired frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered in the frequency field The signal generator changes the RF output frequency according to the entered offset However the frequency entered and displayed in the Frequency Phase menu of the RF Ana Mod function block always corresponds to the RF output frequency Any frequency offset is not taken into considerati
350. the rotary knob Enter moves the cursor to the highlighted menu area When the cursor is placed on a lower level area in the menu the area is highlighted by a grey frame The currently selected item is printed on a blue background in the example the selected directory The rotary knob and the arrow keys up down move the cursor only within the grey framed area recent data sets an smb Lists SavRcl e Clicking the rotary knob Enter terminates the setting i e selection of a file The cursor is either set on the next higher menu level or the menu is closed as in our example The left right cursor keys first shift the entry focus within the menu range form left to right or vice versa in the example from the directory tree to the file list Press again and the entry focus is shifted up one menu level Clicking the rotary knob Enter performs a setting In the example of the File Select menu this is the display of the subdirectories if a directory is marked and if a file is marked the selection of this file After a file has been selected the menu closes automatically 1407 0812 62 3 12 E 2 R amp S SMB Setting Parameters e The ESC key moves the cursor to the next higher menu level Selects a menu area Select menu area using the Select menu area using the rotary knob or the arrow keys arrow keys Press the Enter The menu area is selected Press the rotary knob or the key by selecting an entry ENTER key
351. time as an already active modulation The previous modulation has been switched off Example Enabling FM modulation switches PM modulation off SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register Unknown list type specified 242 The list type selected is not valid for the desired operation Example The file extension for user correction files is uco It is not possible to enter another file extension when selecting a user correction file SCPI Device specific error sets bit 3 in the ESR register 1407 0806 32 9 13 E 2 R amp S SMB Index Eeer 5 3 E OT heen et renee tee ne eee Areva er re mer ee ee renee ere 5 2 CALE EE 5 3 RE 6 3 RE 6 3 EE ee 6 3 RE 6 3 Eeer 6 3 hee Ee deed 6 4 oi Gi el area ene ener ant re ae eRe er et te ee RE PEE 6 4 K 6 4 COP EE 6 4 KEE 6 4 See 6 4 DES Cocca A sigh GE dE 6 4 See 6 4 BERS EE 6 4 PON ee 6 5 Kei 6 5 e E 6 5 KEE 6 5 Eed ee 6 5 OTE E 6 5 RE 6 5 0 Ee e 9 7 1 100 Command EMON seinra a E EERS 9 4 101 Invalid Characher 9 6 102 ME GINO a5 eege gue eene 9 9 103 Invalid SCD e EE 9 6 104 Datla YPE CIT TEE 9 5 108 Parameter not allowed ananannnennnnnennnnnnenneenn 9 7 109 MISSING Darameier 9 7 112 Program mnemonic too Jong 9 8 113 Undefined header 9 10 114 Header suffix Out Of range aaaaa0aannnaaneenenenaenn 9 6 123 Exponent too large sicsiicscccseiessesevernstemveeandeccoossdates 9 5 124 TOO Many GIQ
352. tion Options SCPI 1 RAD See data sheet Compliant SOURce PM MODE NORMal HDEViation LNOise The command selects the mode for the phase modulation Parameters HBANdwith The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation is available HDEViation The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available Phase noise is improved for low frequencies The range for modulation frequency is limited see data sheet This mode is recommended for low modulation frequencies and high PhiM deviation LNOise Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close to CW mode The range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation is reduced see data sheet Example PM MODE HDEV selects high deviation mode for external phase modulation RST value Resolution Options SCPI NORMal Compliant SOURce PM SENSitivity The command queries the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in RAD V The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected SOUR PM SOUR EXT The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting SOUR PM DEViation This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input The command is a query command and therefore has no RST value Example PM DEV 1 sets a modulation deviation of 1RAD PM SENS queries the input sensitivity at the EXT MOD input Response 1 since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V the resulting sensit
353. tion blocks represent elements of signal generation e g the Mod block which contains all menus required for modulation signal configuration In this block all modulations can be selected Function blocks displayed with a blue frame can be directly switched on and off by means of the key In the example 1407 0812 62 3 1 E 2 Operating Concept R amp S SMB amplitude modulation can be activated in this way The menus of the highlighted function blocks can be called by clicking the rotary knob or by pressing the key Modulation config Frequency Mod On Phase Mod Pulse Mod The signal flow between the function blocks and the employed inputs and outputs are also shown LF MOD E The menu tree can be opened and closed with the key The menu tree is organized in the same way as the directories under Windows The function blocks correspond to the first directory level the menus to subdirectories Mod Gen 3 LF Freq Sweep LF Output Pulse Gen Modulation RF Setup Help Operation corresponds to the Linux concept To offer the user a familiar environment operation is very similar to operation of Linux user interfaces All menus and tables are made up of known elements e g selection lists FM Mode Normal FM Deviation 1 000 Int Ext Poubie Pulse State CG On check boxes or entry fields A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active In the highlighted element
354. tion source and for the LF Output In Sweep mode SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE the frequency is linked to the sweep frequency Example LFO2 FREQ 5kHz sets the frequency of the LF generator 2 signal to 5 kHz RST value Options Correlation 1 kHz LFO FREQ for LFO FREQ MODE SWE Compliant linked to sweep frequency SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MANual STARt STOP In Sweep mode SOUR LFO FREQ MODE SWE the command sets the frequency for the next sweep step in the Step sweep mode SOUR LFO SWE MODE MAN Here only frequency values between the settings SOUR LFO FREQ STAR and STOP are permitted Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR LFO FREQ MAN command Example LFO SWE MODE MAN sets the Step sweep mode LFO FREQ MAN 5 kHz sets an LF frequency of 5 kHz for the next step in the Step sweep mode LFO FREQ MODE SWE sets the LF Sweep mode An LF frequency of 5 kHz is output LFO FREQ MAN 5 1 kHz triggers the next sweep step with a frequency of 5 1 KHz RST value Resolution Options SCPI tkHz Ion E Compliant SOURce LFOutput FREQuency MODE CW FlXed SWEep The command sets the instrument LF operating mode and therefore also the commands used to set the output frequency Parameters CW FlXed The instrument operates in fixed frequency mode CW and FlXed are synonyms The output frequency is set with SOURce LFOutput FREQuency SWEep The instrument operates in SWEep mode The fr
355. to the selected ASCII file The command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists LIST DEXC AFIL SEL var rs_gen listmode import list csv selects that ASCII file list csv is imported LIST DEXC SEL var rs_gen listmode import list_imp selects that the ASCII file list csv is imported into list mode list list_imp LIST DEXC EXEC starts the import of the ASCII file data into the list mode file pf Revice specific 1407 0806 32 6 54 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description SOURce LIST DEXChange MODE IMPort EXPort The command selects if list mode lists should be imported or exported Depending on the selection her the file select command define either the source or the destination for list mode lists and ASCII files Example LIST DEXC MODE IMP selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are imported and transferred into list mode lists LIST DEXC TART iSSEE E vars rs gen 11 stmode import ter sv selects that ASCII file list csv is imported LIST DEXC YSEL var rs gen listmode import list imp selects that the ASCII file list csv is imported into list mode list list_imp pf Bevice specifio SOURce LIST DEXChange SELect lt list_name gt The command selects the list mode list to be imported or exported The
356. tomatic Level Control State Off Sample amp Hold Search Once The lower sections provide access to function User Correction see section User Correction page 4 39 1407 0806 32 4 3 E 2 Automatic Level Control ALC R amp S SMB State ALC NOTE Search Once ALC 1407 0806 32 Activates deactivates internal level control Off Internal level control is deactivated Sample amp Hold Remote control command DOUR POWTALC OFF SOUR POW ALC OMOD SHOL Auto Default state Level control is automatically adapted to the operating states Remote control command SOUR POW ALC AUTO On Internal level control is permanently activated Remote control command SOUR POW ALC ON The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement When pulse modulation is activated the ALC state of the R amp S SMB is automatically changed to ALC OFF Sample amp Hold In this state the ALC loop is opened and the output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly In order to set the correct output level a sample amp hold measurement is executed after each frequency or level setting The level is decreased by 30 dB during Sample amp Hold measurement Manually activates level control briefly to allow the level to be calibrated the Sample amp Hold setting must be selected Remote control command SOUR POW ALC SONC 4 38 E 2 R amp S SMB User Correction User Correction The User
357. topped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current level Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start level Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current sweep is stopped and the Extern Start Stop sweep starts at the start level when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start level The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR EAUT SOUR POW MODE SWE External trigger 4 52 E 2 R amp S SMB Reset Sweep RF Level Sweep Execute Single Sweep RF Level Sweep Sweep Mode Resets the sweep The start level is set and the next sweep starts from there Remote control command SWE RES ALL Triggers the sweep manually A manual sweep can only be triggered if Mode Single is selected Remote control commands SOUR SWE POW MODE AUTO TRIG PSW SOUR SING SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR SWE POW EXEC The sweep range sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section Start Level RF Level Sweep Stop Level RF Level Sweep Current Level RF Level Sweep Step RF Level Sweep Dwell Time RF Level Sweep 1407 0806 32 Sets the start level Remote control command
358. trument Settings The section General Instrument Settings describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation Most of these settings can only be accessed by means of menus which are opened using the front panel key The general instrument settings affect various functions such as storing instrument settings using the key or setting the IEC IEEE bus address in the menu of the key The order in which the descriptions are given corresponds to the layout of the keys on the front panel of the R amp S SMB from top left to bottom right Default Instrument Settings Preset Key The key calls up a defined instrument setup All parameters and switching states are preset also those of inactive operating modes The default instrument settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings Remote control command RST When the instrument is switched on it is not the preset state that is active but rather the instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched off An exeption is the state of the RF output The state of the RF output power on state can be set to be always off in the EMF menu of the RF block User defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the File menu The following table gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings The other presets can be found in the information accompanying the IEC IEEE bus commands Chapter Remote Control Commands
359. trument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used Remote control command ROL 2 nocan immediate x Loads the selected configuration from one of the three intermediate memories If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored the sweep is started when the recall command is called If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored this list is also loaded If the list has been deleted in the meantime an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded If the list has been overwritten in the meantime the new entries will be used A message appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory Remote control command RCL 1 1407 0806 32 4 22 E 2 Test Equipment Depot 800 517 8431 99 Washington Street Melrose MA 02176 FAX 781 665 0780 TestEquipmentDepot com R amp S SMB Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key File Management File The File Management menu provides all the functions required for file management Directories can be created and files copied deleted and moved between the directories on the devices CompactFlash Card and memory stick ucorhigh uco Create New Cut Copy Paste Rename Delete FA File Type All Files rUe Type Selects the file types to be indicated If a file type with a specific file extension lsw is selected only files with this extension are indicat
360. tton An exception are the Setup and File menus In the Setup menu general settings are made which are not directly concerned with signal generation e g setting of the IEC IEEE bus address In the File menu files and lists are managed These menus can only be called with the and keys Specific settings can also be made directly in the block diagram e g activating a function block by means of the key Changes affecting the signal flow are immediately visible in the graphics display Calling a Menu Setting Parameters After instrument switch on the cursor is always on the first function block of the diagram default setting It can be moved by means of the rotary knob or the arrow keys Clicking the rotary knob opens the menu associated with the function block The key opens the complete menu tree With the aid of the appropriate keys and softkeys the cursor can also be moved to the header area or the Winbar e The and keys activate the frequency or level entry fields in the header area e The key moves the cursor to the block diagram e The key moves the Winbar to the forground The button that was active last in the Winbar is highlighted The associated menu is activated by clicking the rotary knob Enter e The key opens the complete menu tree the and keys the respective menus Menus can be closed with the key e The cursor can also be moved with the key However the function of this key depends on the current cursor posit
361. tup Setting cc ceeeccccccceeceeeeesseeceeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeesseueaaeseeeeseessaaaaeses 4 17 lee e e EE 4 17 Switching to Manual Control Local Key ccccccccccccceecceeesseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeaeseeeeessueeeseseeeeeeeaaas 4 17 Messages IMO EE 4 18 FIED SV Siem Ee EE 4 18 Storing and Loading Instrument Data File Key cccccsesssecceccessesseceeeeeeeeeeeessceeeeeeesenseeeeeeeeeeaas 4 19 SCT EE 4 19 Storing Instrument SettiNgS File 4 20 L ading Instrument Settings EE 4 21 Fie Managements EE 4 23 FB eum lee EE EE 4 25 OVEMIEW Ol RP SIGN cic ee et i eee a ee 4 25 iesen 4 26 Frequency Menu 4 27 REPNA itech Si a sathsmstaaced phat aestaaediaase atestaaied ebaystoeta anol game dinenessieniebaystae 4 29 Pases E EE 4 29 ne Relerenee Frequency Mererence OSGIalOl sitters Sater Koei ee ce a ee aa 4 30 Reference Oscillator En EE 4 30 Pa WS EE 4 32 RE E E 4 33 Ee ee EN PROTEC HOM EE 4 35 1407 0806 32 LA E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Instrument Functions PU GO 4 36 FE eI EE 4 36 Automatic Level Control ALG EE 4 37 Automatic Level Control Me NU EE 4 37 ES PG Cie GINO areca eran ees Neat csoc hc ce nas eetes ee 4 39 User Correction Men 4 39 SWECO IOUS cmn e a aa a E 4 44 FIeQuenCy SWEEP MeN ET 4 44 BR EE E EE 4 50 ESTES HAY G aeiae a ne ee 4 54 BE Oe ee RE 4 54 WOGUIATIONS E 4 61 Modulation ee 4 61 Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations or Other Operating Modes 4 62 A
362. u Moves the cursor in tables and selection lists Clicking the rotary knob Enter terminates entries In this case the entry mode is terminated and the value set Keys for setting and navigation in the display and See chapter 3 section for setting parameters Setting Parameters Arrow keys Vary the entry value or highlight a selected list item in the editing mode Highlight parameters in menus and tables up down Move the cursor in the entry fields editing mode Highlight parameters in menus and tables left right 1407 0812 62 1 6 E 2 R amp S SMB Legend for Front Panel View 5 Keys for settings and navigation in the display and for setting parameters a ESC See chapter 3 section CLOSE Setting Parameters CLOSE Calls the next higher selection level This opens up j the following functions Closes the active menu if the i cursor is in the top level menu parameter selection Switches between different entry fields of a menu Quits the editing mode and restores the previous value This function is only available in the editing mode i e only before an entry is confirmed or selected with Enter Cancels queries in message windows Shifts the entry cursor from the frequency or level display to the previously active menu or to the previously highlighted block in the block diagram if no menu is active DIAGR Brings the block diagram to the foreground Active m
363. ue Resolution Options SCPI SINGle ee R o e Device specific TRIGger SWEep IMMediate The command starts the sweeps which is activated The sweep to be executed depends on the respective MODE setting SOUR SWEep POW FREQ MODE and SOUR LFO SWEep FREQ MODE The command corresponds to the manual control command Execute Trigger This command triggers an event and therefore has no RST value Example TRIG _ starts all active sweeps RST value Resolution Options SCPI Device specific 1407 0806 32 6 102 E 2 R amp S SMB Command Description TRIGger SWEep SOURce AUTO IMMediate SINGIe EXTernal BUS The command sets the trigger source for all sweeps The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual control SCPI uses other names for the parameters these names are also accepted by the instrument The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration An overview of the various names is given in the following table SCPI name Command under manual control AUTO IMMediate MODE AUTO SINGle BUS MODE SINGLE EXTernal EXTernal MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT TRIG STEP The trigger is free running i e the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously As soon as one sweep is finished the next sweep is started SINGle The sweep is triggered by the IEC IEEE bus commands SOURce SWEep POWer FREQuency EXEC Or TRG Or TRIGger PSWeep FSWeep IMMediat
364. uency POWer use the IEEE 754 format for double precision floating point numbers Each number is represented by 8 bytes Example a 125 345678E6 b 127 876543E6 CALL IBWRT generator s SOURCE CORRECTION CSET DATA FREQ 216 MKDS a MKDS b in the command string introduces the binary block 2 indicates that 2 digits specifying the length will follow next 16 is the length of the binary block in bytes here 2 double precision floating point number with 8 bytes each The actual binary data follow now As the function IBWRT requires a text string MKD is used for the type conversion The following ASCII format has the same effect CALL IBWRT generators SOURce CORRection CSET DATA FREQ 1254 SA OO Ten L2 ee E EN e 5 16 E 2 R amp S SMB SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Overview of Syntax Elements The following survey offers an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the key words of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data Binary B10110 Octal 07612 Hexa HF3A7 Block 21312 A white spa
365. ursor keys will then navigate only within this area By using the left right cursor keys it is possible to switch between the directory tree and the file list The subdirectories of the selected directory will only be displayed after a short delay to allow quick navigation in the directory tree Pressing the ESC key again shifts the entry focus up one level The button for saving or loading the file can be selected and pressed After the setting e g after selecting the file the menu will be closed automatically 1407 0812 62 3 22 E 2 R amp S SMB File Management e Load file Mark file and load it by clicking the rotary knob or by pressing the Select button softkey e Save file Enter file name in the File Name field Mark the directory to which the file is to be saved and then click the Save button softkey e Create file Enter file name in the File Name field Mark the directory to which the file is to be saved and then click the Create button softkey The created file is empty it must be filled with the necessary values in the individual editor File Manager The File Manager allows general file management such as copying shifting renaming and deleting files as well as generating new directories The File Manager can be called up in any menu to which files can be saved Call up is either at the level of the small selection menu User Cor Data or via the File Manager button in the File Select window File Manager
366. ution Options SCPI LiNear a Device specific SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LiNear 0 STOP START The command sets the step width for the linear sweep This command is linked to the command LFOutput SWEep FREQuency POINts as follows The following applies for STARt lt STOP POINts STOP STARt STEP LIN 1 If STEP LIN changes the value of POINTs is adjusted The STARt and STOP value Is retained Example LFO FREQ STAR sets the start frequency to 2 kHz LFO FREQ STOP sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz LFO SWE SPAC LIN sets linear sweep spacing LFO SWE STEP 2 kHz sets the sweep step width to 2 kHz The number of sweep steps for linear sweep spacing POINts Is automatically set to 11 RST value Resolution Options Correlation SCPI 1kHz 0 1 Hz The value of LFO SWE POIN Is Device specific adjusted automatically 1407 0806 32 6 47 E 2 Command Description R amp S SMB SOURce LFOutput SWEep FREQuency STEP LOGarithmic 0 01 100 PCT The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps The next frequency value of a sweep is calculated for STARt lt STOP using the following formula New frequency Old frequency STEP LOG x Old frequency STEP LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency The frequency is increased by this fraction for the next sweep step Usually STEP LOG Is given in percent whereby the suffix PCT must always be used The
367. view of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers The program examples for IEC IEEE bus programming are all written in VISUAL BASIC A condition for programming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL Niglobal bas and VBIB32 Vbib_32 bas are added to the projects 1407 0806 32 5 1 E 2 Getting Started R amp S SMB Note Manual control is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contrast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status Therefore control programs should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings Getting Started The short and simple operating sequence given below permits fast putting into operation of the instrument and setting of its basic functions As a prerequisite the IEC IEEE bus address which is factory set to 28 must not have been changed gt Connect instrument and controller using IEC IEEE bus cable and switch them on gt Write and start the following program on the controller CALL IBFIND DEV1 generator Open port to the instrument CALL IBPAD generator 28 Inform controller about instrument address CALL IBWRT generators RST CLS Reset instrument CALL IBWRT generator FREQ 50MHz Set frequency to 50 MHz CALL IBWRT generator POW 7 3dBm Set output level 7 3m dBm C
368. ware Interfaces TCPIPO 127 0 0 1 inst0 INSTH Session 0x001B36E 0 Template Basic L I Interface 170 viEnableE vent viDisableE vert viDiscardE vente viw atOnEvent viGet ttribute viSetAttribute viLock viUnlock viEventHandler E Actual Access Rey Lock Type Ze Exclusive f Shared Return Value Acquire 4 lock on the resource VXI 11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the IEC IEEE bus Table 8 4 VXI 11 Interface Messages amp ABO Abort Aborts the processing of the commands just received Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the Remote state remote control Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel ke
369. weep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument BNC connector INST TRIG Remote control command SOUR SWE E REO MODE AUTO TRIG FSW SOUR EXT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger 4 46 E 2 R amp S SMB Extern Step Extern Start Stop Sweep Mode Sets a step by step sweep cycle Each sweep step is triggered by an external trigger signal trigger source as described under Extern Single The step width is set below at entry field Step Lin or Step Log If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Step mode the current sweep is stopped The Extern Step sweep always starts at the start frequency when triggered The Reset button resets the sweep to the start frequency Remote control command SOUR OWE t REO MODE STEP SOUR SWE FREQ SPAC LIN SOURS SWE FREOQ STEP LIN 1 MHZ TRIG FSW SOUR EXT SOUR FREQ MODE SWE External trigger Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started stopped and restartet by subsequent external trigger events The first external trigger signal starts the sweep Start The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency Stop The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency Start If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the Extern Start Stop mode the current
370. ximal value for the attenuation If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g several inputs the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Optional keywords must be specified if they select a function with the suffix Example SOURce LFOutput2 FREQuency 1 5kHz This command sets the frequency of secondLF generator frame 9 12 E 2 R amp S SMB SCPI Command Structure and Syntax Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon A colon at the beginning of a command marks the root node of the command tree Example SOURce POWer CENTer MINimum OUTPut STATe ON This command line contains two commands The first command is part of the SOURce system and is used to specify the center frequency of the output signal of RF output The second command is part of the OUTPut system and sets the attenuation of the output signal of RF output If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below t
371. y Selecting a Unit Setting Parameters the unit displayed in the unit field of the parameter in the menu is assigned If the unit key is pressed later the unit is changed but not the value The value is recalculated to suit the new unit e g the display changes from 1000 to 1 when the Hz is changed to kHz The new unit is then indicated in the value field of the menu Assignment G n dBuv Mu pV k m mV x1 dB m ON OFF TOGGLE BACK SPACE giga nano dBuV for RF levels dBu for LF levels mega micro uV for levels kilo milli mV for levels basic unit dBm for levels dB for level offset and level step width same function as ENTER key for unit free values See chapter 3 section Setting Parameters Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off Switches between two or more settings e g items of selection lists At the end of a list the cursor is set on the first entry again Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 1 5 E 2 Legend for Front Panel View R amp S SMB 5 Keys for settings and navigation in the display and for setting parameters Keys for settings and navigation in the display and See chapter 3 section for setting parameters Setting Parameters Rotary knob Varies the value at a cursor position For frequency and level entry a fixed step width can be set and activated for the variation Moves the entry cursor in the block diagram or men
372. yed for Current Index It is now possible to scroll up and down in the list in discrete steps by varying the index or to enter a freely selectable index The duration of a list step is determined by the time between two index entries Current index 0 Remote control commands n a only external step mode is available in remote control Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list as with Single but started by an external trigger Button Reset restarts the list at the starting point The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG on the rear of the instrument Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE AUTO SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR EXT Step by step cycle using the external trigger signal Each trigger event starts a single step The list is processed in ascending order The duration of a list step is determined by the time between two trigger events Button Reset restarts the list at the starting point The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG on the rear of the instrument Remote control commands SOUR FREQ MODE LIST SOUR LIST MODE STEP SOUR LIST TRIG SOUR EXT external trigger 4 56 E 2 R amp S SMB Execute Single List Mode Mode Single only Reset List Mode Dwell Time List Mode Current Index List Mode Blank RF Output Default ON List Mode Learn List Mode Data List Mode 1407 0806 32 List Mode Trigg
373. ys 1407 0806 32 8 E 2 Hardware Interfaces R amp S SMB USB Connection USB and USB IN The instrument is equipped as standard with three USB universal serial bus interfaces which are located at the rear of the instrument USB One of them is a type A interfaces host USB which establishes a connection to the controller It can be used for connecting peripherals such as mouse and keyboard or a memory stick for data transmission USB IN The second USB interface is a type B interface device USB hence the instrument is assigned as device not as host It can be used for remote control see chapter Remote Control Basics 1407 0806 32 8 8 E 2 R amp S SMB Contents Error Messages Contents Chapter 9 Error Messages DEMO NCSSAG CS ci 9 1 Introduction Status Information and MeSSagQe ccseeeeeescesessneeeeseeeeenssneeeeeseeeeensnseeeeesees 9 1 baten csteicees cane etei ore ct E 9 1 Stelle Message Siaina EE EE AEEA ETE E 9 3 Alphabetical List of SCPI Error Messages sssceeeeeeeeeceeensneeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeneeeenesseoonenees 9 4 Blockdata notalgwed 168 EE 9 4 Character data not allowed 148 ccccccccccccssseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseseesseeeeesseeaeaseeeeeeeesseaaseeeeeess 9 4 Gharacter data tolong EE EE 9 4 Command Enor TOO EE 9 4 Command protected 203 E 9 4 Male GUO TANG et 222 E 9 5 Dale lV OS enor En EE 9 5 Rate ee e el S00 EE 9 5 EXDONENL 100 large 2123 EE 9

R&S SMB100A Complete Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S SMB100A Complete Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S SMB100A Complete Manual